0% found this document useful (0 votes)
28 views505 pages

Statics P1

Uploaded by

jumbo prints
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
28 views505 pages

Statics P1

Uploaded by

jumbo prints
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 505

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

General Certificate of Education Ordinary Level


*4555331710*

STATISTICS 4040/01
Paper 1 October/November 2009
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper.
Additional Materials: Mathematical tables
Pair of compasses
Protractor

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions in Section A and not more than four questions from Section B.
If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
The use of an electronic calculator is expected in this paper.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

DC (SC/SLM) 11521/8
© UCLES 2009 [Turn over

www.xtremepapers.net
2

Section A [36 marks]

Answer all of the questions 1 to 6.

1 A small boatyard makes canoes. The pictogram below shows the number of canoes made in the
years 2002 and 2005.

Year Number of canoes

2002

2005

represents 10 canoes.

(i) State how many canoes were made in

(a) the year 2002,

............................................................[1]

(b) the year 2005.

............................................................[1]

(ii) Draw a pictogram to represent the 33 canoes which the boatyard made in the year 2008.

[2]

© UCLES 2009 4040/01/O/N/09

www.xtremepapers.net
3

2 A large-scale survey is to be carried out, with the required information being collected by means of
a questionnaire.

(i) Give two purposes of firstly conducting a small-scale survey using a pilot questionnaire.

Purpose 1 .................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

Purpose 2 .................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

(ii) Give one advantage and one disadvantage of sending the questionnaire to respondents
through the post, rather than using interviewers to ask the questions on it.

Advantage ................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

Disadvantage ...........................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

3 In a large school a daily record was kept, from the start of each month, of the total number of
absences up to and including that day.
The totals recorded for the first 11 school days of one month were as follows.

12 23 34 43 51 65 77 94 111 123 140

(i) Write the data in a form showing the number of absences on each individual day.

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

(ii) Obtain the mean and the median of the data you have written in (i).

Mean ...............................................................

Median ............................................................[3]

(iii) Explain why there is a problem with stating a value for the mode of the data you have written
in (i).

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2009 4040/01/O/N/09 [Turn over

www.xtremepapers.net
4

4 Five competitors in a quiz are isolated from each other. They are asked, in a random order, the
same question, until one of them gives the correct answer.
At this point the questioning stops. Two of them know the correct answer, and three do not.

(i) State the maximum number of times the question would have to be asked.

............................................................[1]

(ii) If N is the number of times the question is asked,

(a) state the possible values of N,

........................................................... [1]

(b) calculate the probability of each value, presenting your results in a suitable table.

[4]

© UCLES 2009 4040/01/O/N/09

www.xtremepapers.net
5

5 In a large factory the number of repair jobs reported during each of the three daily shifts (Early,
Late and Night) was recorded over a three week period. The following table shows some of the
results.

Shift
Week Early Late Night Total
1 34

2 34 18

3 32 84

Total 44 250

(i) The total number of repair jobs reported during the Early and Late shifts was the same. Use
this information to insert two values into the table above. [1]

(ii) In week 1 and week 3 there were equal numbers of repair jobs reported during the Night shift.
Use this information to insert a further two values into the table above. [1]

(iii) Showing all your working, calculate the remaining five values and insert them into the table
above.

[5]

© UCLES 2009 4040/01/O/N/09 [Turn over

www.xtremepapers.net
6

6 The table below gives, by category of employment in the year 2007, the number of employees,
and the number of accidents they suffered, at a particular factory. It also shows the standard
population for the whole industry of which the factory is part.

Category of Number of Number of Standard


employment accidents employees population (%)
Management 3 20 4

Technical 9 75 17

Skilled 18 230 41

Unskilled 25 115 38

Total 55 440 100

(i) Calculate the crude accident rate per thousand for the factory.

............................................................[3]

(ii) Showing your full working for at least one of the categories, calculate the standardised
accident rate per thousand for the factory.

............................................................[5]

(iii) Explain briefly why the answers you have obtained to (i) and (ii) are not equal.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2009 4040/01/O/N/09

www.xtremepapers.net
7

BLANK PAGE

Section B starts on page 8

4040/01/O/N/09 [Turn over

www.xtremepapers.net
8

Section B [64 marks]

Answer not more than four of the questions 7 to 11.

Each question in this section carries 16 marks.

7 The lengths of a certain engineering component coming off a production line are measured.

(i) State whether the variable ‘length’ is

(a) qualitative or quantitative,

............................................................[1]

(b) discrete or continuous.

............................................................[1]

The length of each component is intended to be exactly 5.008 cm. Accurate measurements of a
sample of 80 of these components from the production line produced the following cumulative
frequency curve.

80

70

60

50

Cumulative
frequency 40

30

20

10

0
5.000 5.002 5.004 5.006 5.008 5.010 5.012 5.014 5.016
Length of component (cm)

© UCLES 2009 4040/01/O/N/09

www.xtremepapers.net
9

(ii) The graph is much steeper close to the intended length than it is at either end.

What does this tell you about the precision of the components produced?

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

(iii) Use the graph to estimate, to 4 decimal places,

(a) the median of the lengths,

...................................................... cm [1]

(b) the lower quartile of the lengths,

...................................................... cm [1]

(c) the 90th percentile of the lengths.

...................................................... cm [2]

(iv) Estimate the number of components which have a length of more than 5.0084 cm.

............................................................[2]

Components shorter than 5.004 cm, or with length 5.012 cm or more, are rejected.

(v) Estimate from the graph how many components in this sample are accepted.

............................................................[3]

(vi) Use the graph to estimate, to 4 decimal places, for the accepted components only,

(a) the median of the lengths,

...................................................... cm [2]

(b) the lower quartile of the lengths.

...................................................... cm [1]

© UCLES 2009 4040/01/O/N/09 [Turn over

www.xtremepapers.net
10

8 (a) A turn in a game consists of rolling an unbiased six-sided dice, with faces numbered 1 to 6.
If the face landing uppermost is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, then that number is the score for the turn.
If the 6-face lands uppermost, the dice is rolled again, and the score for the turn is the sum of
6 and the number which lands uppermost on the second roll.

(i) List the scores which it is possible to obtain in a turn.

.........................................................................................[1]

(ii) Calculate, as a fraction, the probability of obtaining the lowest possible score in a turn.

............................................................[1]

(iii) Calculate, as a fraction, the probability of obtaining the highest possible score in a turn.

............................................................[1]

(iv) Calculate the probability that, in two consecutive turns, a player will obtain the lowest
possible score and the highest possible score, in either order.

............................................................[2]

© UCLES 2009 4040/01/O/N/09

www.xtremepapers.net
11

(b) You are one of a class of 10 students. A bag contains one blue disc and 9 red discs.
The students take it in turn to draw a disc at random from the bag without replacement.
The student who draws the blue disc will win a prize.
You have been given the choice of drawing a disc first, fourth or last.

Calculate the probability of winning the prize for each of these three alternatives, and hence
state which one you would choose.

...............................................................................................................................................[5]

(c) Box A contains 7 green balls and 3 white balls. Box B contains 5 green balls and 9 white
balls.

A ball is selected at random from Box A and placed in Box B. A ball is then selected at
random from Box B and placed in Box A.

Calculate the probability that, after these two operations, the numbers of green and white
balls in Box A and in Box B are the same as at the start.

............................................................[6]

© UCLES 2009 4040/01/O/N/09 [Turn over

www.xtremepapers.net
12

9 A new pressure gauge has been fitted onto a piece of equipment in a chemical plant.
Past experience has shown that such gauges may need to have their calibration (scale of
measurement) adjusted.
To determine whether any adjustments are necessary on the new gauge, several pressure
readings are taken using both it and a standard gauge which is known to be accurate. All readings
are in units of megapascals (MPa).

Pressure (MPa)
Reading
Standard gauge (x) New gauge (y)
A 4 7
B 38 41
C 7 13
D 11 16
E 15 21
F 27 33
G 31 36
H 35 41

(i) Briefly explain why the standard gauge readings, rather than the new gauge readings, are
plotted on the x-axis.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

(ii) Draw a scatter diagram of the data on the grid below.

45

40

35

30

New 25
Gauge
Pressure
20
(MPa)
15

10

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
Standard Gauge Pressure (MPa)
[3]

© UCLES 2009 4040/01/O/N/09

www.xtremepapers.net
13

(iii) Explain why you should use readings A, C, D and E to calculate one semi-average, and B, F,
G and H to calculate the other semi-average.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

(iv) Calculate the overall mean and the two semi-averages, and plot them on your graph.

[5]

(v) Draw a line of best fit through your plotted averages. [1]

(vi) Either by calculation, or by using your graph, find the equation of the line of best fit, and write
it in the form y = mx + c.

y = ...........................................................[3]

(vii) Explain what the values of m and c in your equation tell you about any necessary adjustments
to the new gauge.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2009 4040/01/O/N/09 [Turn over

www.xtremepapers.net
14

10 A random sample of 200 customers leaving a supermarket during one day was asked how much
money (in $) and how much time (in minutes) they had spent during their visit.

(i) The following table summarises the amounts spent.

Amount spent ($) Number of customers


0 – under 30 18
30 – under 50 36
50 – under 60 32
60 – under 70 37
70 – under 80 21
80 – under 100 41
100 – under 150 15
Total 200

(a) Complete the histogram, which illustrates the amounts spent during each visit, on the
grid below. The rectangle representing the 30 – under 50 class has been drawn.

45

40

35

30

25
Number of
customers
per $10
20

15

10

0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Amount spent ($)
[5]
© UCLES 2009 4040/01/O/N/09

www.xtremepapers.net
15

(b) State the modal class.

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(c) If the 80 – under 100 and 100 – under 150 classes were merged to form a single class,
80 – under 150, calculate the value on the vertical axis of the height of the rectangle
which would be drawn to represent the merged class.

............................................................[2]

(ii) (a) The following table summarises the times spent by the customers in the supermarket.

Number of
Time (minutes)
customers
0 – under 20 10
20 – under 40 49
40 – under 50 54
50 – under 60 45
60 – under 90 31
90 – under 120 11
Total 200

Estimate, to 3 significant figures, the mean and the standard deviation of the times spent
in the supermarket by these customers.

Mean ................................................. minutes

Standard deviation ............................................ minutes [6]

(b) If the 60 – under 90 and 90 – under 120 classes are merged, the mean will increase.
Explain why this is so.

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2009 4040/01/O/N/09 [Turn over

www.xtremepapers.net
16

11 (a) At the start of the school year, all 125 girls at a school had to choose to play at least one
of the sports hockey, netball and tennis. The following diagram illustrates the numbers who
chose to play the different sports.

Hockey Netball

8 30 36

7
9 x

20

Tennis

(i) Calculate the value of x.

............................................................[2]

(ii) Explain what the value of x represents.

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(iii) Showing all your working, determine which sport was chosen by the greatest number of
girls.

............................................................[2]

© UCLES 2009 4040/01/O/N/09

www.xtremepapers.net
17

One month after the start of the year, girls were allowed to change their choice, as long as they
still played at least one of the sports.

The following changes were made:


Two girls who had chosen to play only hockey decided to play both tennis and hockey.
Three girls who had chosen to play only tennis decided to play only netball instead.
Four girls who had chosen to play all three sports decided to stop playing tennis, but to continue
playing both hockey and netball.

(iv) Insert, on the diagram below, the number of girls who have chosen to play the different
sports after these changes have been made.

Hockey Netball

Tennis

. [3]

© UCLES 2009 4040/01/O/N/09 [Turn over

www.xtremepapers.net
18

(b) In this part of the question, you are NOT required to DRAW any pie charts.

The following table gives the number of different models of car sold by a large company
in the year 2005.

Model Number sold

Two-door saloon 491

Four-door saloon 646

Hatchback 542

Estate 521

(i) If these figures were to be illustrated by a pie chart, calculate, to the nearest degree, the
angle of the sector representing sales of Estate cars.

°
......................................................... [2]

(ii) In the year 2008, the company sold, in total, 26% more cars than it had sold in 2005.
If the sales in 2005 were illustrated by a pie chart of radius 5 cm, calculate the radius of a
pie chart illustrating the sales in 2008.

...................................................... cm [3]

(iii) In a pie chart illustrating the sales in 2008, the angles of the sectors representing sales of
two-door saloons, four-door saloons and hatchbacks are 72°, 103° and 85° respectively.
Calculate the number of estate cars which were sold in 2008.

............................................................[3]

© UCLES 2009 4040/01/O/N/09

www.xtremepapers.net
19

BLANK PAGE

4040/01/O/N/09

www.xtremepapers.net
20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
4040/01/O/N/09

www.xtremepapers.net
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
GCE Ordinary Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2009 question paper


for the guidance of teachers

4040 STATISTICS
4040/01 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 100

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2009 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.

www.xtremepapers.net
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE O LEVEL – October/November 2009 4040 01

1 (i) (a) 20 B1

(b) 45 (allow 44–46) B1

(ii) For three 'whole canoes' and 'something' M1

For an accurate portrayal of 33 A1


[4]

2 (i) To test whether respondents clearly understand the questions. B1


To test whether the responses to the questions provide the information required. B1

(ii) Advantage. Cheap, compared to interviewing costs. B1


Disadvantage. Likely low response rate. B1
[4]

3 (i) Any appreciation of the need to 'un–cumulate' the figures M1


Correct values (either ordered or unordered)
12 11 11 9 8 14 12 17 17 12 17 A1
(8 9 11 11 12 12 12 14 17 17 17)

(ii) Mean = 140/11 (indication of a correct method) M1


= 12.7(272... ) A1
Median = 12 (ft provided the M1 in (i) has scored) B1ft

(iii) Because the data are bi-modal B1


[6]

4 (i) 4 B1

(ii) (a) 1, 2, 3, 4 (ft 1 up to 'their N') B1ft

(b) Correct method (can be implied by two correct results) M1

N P(N)

1 0.4

2 0.3

3 0.2

4 0.1

Any three correct (with or without others) A1


All four correct (and no others) A1
Their values of N and P(N) presented in a suitable table B1
[6]

© UCLES 2009

www.xtremepapers.net
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE O LEVEL – October/November 2009 4040 01

5 (i) Both 103s in the correct places B1

(ii) Both 13s in the correct places B1

(iii) 37 correct (ft 'their 103' – 66) B1ft


39 correct (ft 52 – 'their 13') B1ft
89 correct (ft 52 + 'their 37') B1ft
77 correct (ft 166 – 'their 89') B1ft
30 correct (ft provided both row and column totals tally) B1
[7]

6 (i) Any attempt to use 55 and 440 M1


(55/440) × 1000 M1
= 125 (per thousand) A1

(ii) Management 3/20 × 1000 × 0.04 = 6


Technical 9/75 × 1000 × 0.17 = 20.4
Skilled 18/230 × 1000 × 0.41 = 32.1
Unskilled 25/115 × 1000 × 0.38 =82.6

Correct method used in any one category M1*


One correct value or expression seen A1
All other correct values or expressions seen A1
Summing the rates for the four categories dep M1*
141.10 (per thousand) (AWRT 141.1) A1

(iii) The category of employment structure in the factory is not the same as in the standard
population. B1
[9]

7 (i) (a) Quantitative B1

(b) Continuous B1

(ii) Most of the lengths are close to that intended M1


and so the process is quite precise. A1

(iii) (a) Median = 5.0074 or 5.0075 B1

(b) LQ = 5.0055 B1

(c) 90th percentile = value in the range 5.0105 to 5.0108 inclusive B2

(iv) Sight of an attempt at the cum. freq. at 5.0084 M1


26 A1

(v) cf’s 11 and 77 seen or implied B1


Indication of (higher tolerance limit cf minus lower tolerance limit cf) M1
77 – 11 = 66 A1ft

© UCLES 2009

www.xtremepapers.net
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE O LEVEL – October/November 2009 4040 01

(vi) (a) Correct method for either measure seen, or implied by a correct result M1
Median item is [11 + (66/2)] =44th on graph
5.0077 A1

(b) LQ item is [11 + (66/4)] =27.5th on graph


5.0064 A1
[16]

8 (a) (i) 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 B1

(ii) 1/6 B1

(iii) 1/36 B1

(iv) Correct probability expression using their answers to (ii) and (iii) M1
1/108 A1

(b) P(first) = 1/10 B1


P(fourth) = 9/10 × 8/9 × 7/8 × 1/7 =1/10
P(last) = 9/10 × 8/9 × ……….× 2/3 × ½ × 1 = 1/10
Indication of correct method for either fourth or last M1
P(fourth) = 1/10 A1
P(last) = 1/10 A1
Valid conclusion from their probabilities B1ft

(c) Any appreciation of the fact that the two operations must involve discs of the same
colour B1
P(green discs moved) = 7/10 × 6/15 = 7/25
P(white discs moved) = 3/10 × 10/15 = 1/5
Correct method for either, including seeing 15 (or 14) as the second denominator M1
P(G) = 7/25 A1
P(W) = 1/5 A1
Attempt to sum their probabilities for the two sequences M1
7/25 + 1/5 = 12/25 (= 0.48) A1
[16]

9 (i) Any comment which states or implies that the standard gauge is the independent
variable. B1

(ii) Correctly plotted points (–1 each error or omission) B3

(iii) Because A, C, D and E have the four lowest x-values (or equivalent) B1

(iv) Method for calculating overall mean M1


Plot of (21, 26) A1
Method for calculating either semi-average M1
Plot of (9.25, 14.25) A1
Plot of (32.75, 37.75) A1

(v) Straight line through at least two of their points plotted in (iv) B1

© UCLES 2009

www.xtremepapers.net
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE O LEVEL – October/November 2009 4040 01

(vi) m = AWRT 1.0 B1


c = AWRT 5.0 B1
y = x + 5 (for substituting their stated values of m and c in an equation of the
required form) B1ft

(vii) The equation shows that the new gauge will give a reading 5MPa greater than the
accurate reading given by the standard gauge.
For any correct comment about their equation in context M1
The new gauge calibration therefore needs to be adjusted 5 MPa downwards.
For correct description of required change to calibration cao A1
[16]

10 (i) (a) Any appreciation of area being proportional to frequency M1


Correct heights 6, 20.5, 3 (provided working seen can score even if not drawn)
(one mark each) A3
Correct heights 32, 37, 21 (must be drawn) B1

(b) Allow either 60 – under 70 (tallest rectangle) or 80 – under 100 (highest frequency)
B1

(c) Attempt to sum 41 and 15 and divide by 7 M1


8 A1

(ii) (a) Use of correct class mid-points, seen or implied B1


Sight of a correct method for the mean M1
Mean = 49.8 (cao and must be 3sf) A1
Sight of any correct method for s.d. or variance M1
Standard deviation = AWRT 21.3 or Variance = AWRT 453.6 A1
21.3 (cao and must be 3sf) A1

(b) Any use of the values 90 and 42 M1


A convincing explanation (can imply M1 even if 90 and 42 not mentioned) A1
[16]

11 (a) (i) Attempt to sum values and subtract from 125 M1


x = 15 A1

(ii) x represents the number who chose to play netball and tennis, but not hockey. B1

(iii) Showing all working necessary for a valid comparison to be made. M1


Netball WWW A1

(iv) 6 and 11 seen in correct places. B1


17 and 39 seen in correct places. B1
34 and 3 seen in correct places. B1

(b) (i) 521/'their total' × 360 M1

(ii) Any appreciation of the need to use r2 or √1.26 M1


r2 = 25 × (126/100) or 25 × (2772/2200) A1
r = AWRT 5.6 cm A1

© UCLES 2009

www.xtremepapers.net
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE O LEVEL – October/November 2009 4040 01

(iii) Attempt to obtain total sales for 2008 (may be seen as part of (ii)) M1
Attempt to multiply 2008 total sales by (360 – sum of angles)/360 M1
2772 × (100/360) = 770 A1
[16]

© UCLES 2009

www.xtremepapers.net
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
General Certificate of Education Ordinary Level
* 4 7 9 6 8 2 4 0 5 0 *

STATISTICS 4040/13
Paper 1 October/November 2010
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper.
Additional Materials: Mathematical tables
Pair of compasses
Protractor

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions in Section A and not more than four questions from Section B.
If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
The use of an electronic calculator is expected in this paper.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 21 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

DC (NF/SW) 24563/4
© UCLES 2010 [Turn over
2

Section A [36 marks] For


Examiner’s
Answer all of the questions 1 to 6. Use

1 Four methods of sampling are:

simple random;

stratified random;

quota;

systematic.

State

(i) the method which does not require the use of any form of random numbers,

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) the method which does not require a sampling frame,

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) the method in which the choice of which individual items are selected is left to the
interviewer/researcher,

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) the method which is most prone to bias if there is a pattern in the sampling frame which
repeats at regular intervals,

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(v) the two methods which require the use of random numbers to select every item in a
sample,

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(vi) the two methods which require the population to be subdivided into appropriate
categories.

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10


3

2 Twenty men were asked in which sports they participated regularly. The results are given in For
the diagram below. Examiner’s
Use

Athletics
Badminton
Cricket
Football
Jogging
Rugby
Swimming
Tennis

represents 1 man.

(i) State the name of this form of representation.

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Give one disadvantage of this form of representing data.

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Name the most popular sport among these men.

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) Explain why the number of symbols in the diagram is greater than 20.

..........................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(v) Calculate the percentage of these men who played rugby regularly.

................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10 [Turn over


4

3 In a dancing competition, couples were judged on their performance in three dances. Each For
couple chose their dances from a list. Three of the dances on the list were the Foxtrot (F ), the Examiner’s
Paso Doble (P) and the Tango (T ). The following diagram gives information on the choices of Use
the couples entered in the competition.

F P

7 6 5

2
4 3

In total, there were 50 couples entered in the competition.

(i) Write, in the appropriate place in the diagram, the number of couples who did not choose
any of these three dances.

[2]

(ii) State what the value 6 in the diagram represents.

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Find which of these three dances was chosen by the most couples, and state the number
of couples who chose it.

Dance ......................................................

Number of couples .................................................. [3]


© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10
5

4 The date in the table below relates to the inhabitants of two streets, S and T. For
Examiner’s
Use
Interquartile range of
Street Median age (years)
ages (years)

S 27.5 18.0

T 58.3 4.2

(i) Possible descriptions of the ages of the inhabitants are:

C ages vary, generally old;


D ages vary, generally young;
E ages about the same, generally old;
F ages about the same, generally young.

Select which of these descriptions is most appropriate for the inhabitants of

(a) street S,

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) street T.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

25% of the population of street S is above 34.3 years old.

(ii) State the percentage of the population of street S which is between 27.5 and 34.3 years
old.

................................................... [1]

(iii) Find the lower quartile age of the population of street S.

....................................... years [1]

(iv) For each of the following, state whether it is definitely true, possibly true, or definitely
false.

(a) The lower and upper quartile ages of the population of street T are 56.2 and 60.4
years respectively.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) The oldest inhabitant of street T is older than the oldest inhabitant of street S.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10 [Turn over


6

5 A frequency distribution is given by the table below. For


Examiner’s
Use
Variable Frequency

4 7

7 10

10 6

13 3

The arithmetic mean and the standard deviation of this distribution are 7.58 and 2.88
respectively, each correct to 3 significant figures.

(i) Using these results, and showing your method, find the mean and the variance of the
frequency distribution in the following table.

Variable Frequency

8 7

14 10

20 6

26 3

Mean = ......................................................

Variance = .................................................. [3]

(ii) The table below gives the grouped frequency distribution of a discrete variable.

Variable Frequency

4, 5, 6 7

7, 8, 9 10

10, 11, 12 6

13, 14, 15 3

(a) State the class mid-points of this distribution.

................ , ............... , .............. , ................ [1]

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10


7

(b) Estimate, to 2 significant figures, the mean and the standard deviation of this For
distribution. Examiner’s
Use

Mean = ......................................................

Standard deviation = .................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10 [Turn over


8

6 The following table summarises the age and marital status of the female members of a sports For
club. Examiner’s
Use

Marital Status
Age TOTAL
Single Married Widowed Divorced

Under 20 18 2 0 0 20

20–24 9 13 4 7 33

25–29 7 89 7 11 114

30–39 5 4 4 2 15

40 and over 1 2 1 6 10

TOTAL 40 110 16 26 192

(i) A woman is chosen at random from the club.

(a) State the probability that she is single.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Given that she is in the 30–39 age group, find the probability that she is single.

................................................... [2]

(ii) By considering divorced women aged 25–29, show that age and marital status are not
independent for female members of this club.

[3]

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10


9

BLANK PAGE

[Section B starts on page 10]

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10 [Turn over


10

Section B [64 marks] For


Examiner’s
Answer not more than four of the questions 7 to 11. Use

Each question in this section carries 16 marks.

7 The table below gives the percentages in different age groups of anglers (people whose
hobby is fishing) in the United Kingdom.

Age (years) Percentage of anglers

15–under 25 28

25–under 30 20

30–under 35 22

35–under 45 16

45–under 65 14

On the grid below a histogram representing these ages is to be drawn. The rectangle for the
30–under 35 group is given.

Frequency
density 3

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Age (years)

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10


11

(i) By considering the height of the given rectangle, state, on the answer line below, the For
units of the vertical axis. Examiner’s
Use

................................................... [2]

(ii) Draw the rectangles representing the other four age groups.

[4]

(iii) Briefly explain why it is not possible to obtain an accurate value for the mode from this
histogram.

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) Write down the mid-points of the five age groups.

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(v) Estimate, to 3 significant figures, the mean and the standard deviation of the anglers’ ages.

Mean = ............................................ years

Standard deviation = ...................................... years [6]

(vi) State, giving a reason, which of the mean and median ages you would expect to be
higher for this distribution.

..........................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10 [Turn over
12

8 The lengths, in mm, of a sample of 160 rods produced on a machine are represented by the For
following cumulative frequency curve. Examiner’s
Use

160

140

120

100

Cumulative
frequency
80

60

40

20

0
0 40 50 60 70 80 90
Length (mm)

(i) State which feature of the graph shows that the majority of rods had lengths in the
middle of this range.

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10


13

(ii) Use the graph to estimate For


Examiner’s
(a) the lower quartile length, Use

.......................................... mm [2]

(b) the 80th percentile length.

.......................................... mm [3]

The rods cost $5 each to produce.

Rods can only be used for their intended purpose if their lengths are in the range 55 mm to
75 mm inclusive.

Rods which are longer than 75 mm are shortened to be within the accepted limits, at a cost
of $3 each.

Rods which are shorter than 55 mm cannot be used, and are sold for recycling at $2 each.

(iii) Estimate the number of rods in this sample which

(a) will have to be sold for recycling,

................................................... [1]

(b) can be used after having been shortened,

................................................... [2]

(c) can be used immediately after production.

................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10 [Turn over


14

(iv) By considering the cost of manufacturing all 160 rods in the sample, estimate the mean For
cost per rod of those rods which can be used. Examiner’s
Use

Mean = $ .................................................. [5]

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10


15

BLANK PAGE

[Question 9 is printed on the next page]

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10 [Turn over


16

9 (a) The information below relates to a city in the year 2008. For
Examiner’s
The total population at the start of the year was 420 000. Use

The crude death rate for the city was 9.6 per 1000.

There were 5250 births in the city.

(i) Calculate the number of deaths in the city in the year 2008.

................................................... [2]

(ii) State, giving a reason, whether subtracting your answer to (i) from 5250 would give
the increase in the city’s population in 2008.

..................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) The data in the table below relates to a town in the year 2009.

Number of Death rate per Standard


Age Population
deaths 1000 population

0–24 10 000 70 7 3500

25–49 80 10 3000

50 and over 1500

TOTAL 25 000 262 8000

(i) Fill in the four values which are missing from the table.

[5]

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10


17

(ii) Calculate, to 1 decimal place, and stating the units, the crude death rate and the For
standardised death rate of the town. Examiner’s
Use

Crude death rate = ......................................................

Standardised death rate = .................................................. [5]

It was subsequently discovered that the overall population of the region in which the town
was situated was younger than had been thought, and that a more appropriate standard
population for the three age groups would be 4000, 3000 and 1000 respectively.

(iii) Without carrying out any further calculations, state what effect using this new
standard population would have on the crude death rate and on the standardised
death rate of the town.

..................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10 [Turn over


18

10 Zaheer only buys petrol when the tank of his car is almost empty, except that if he passes a For
garage selling cheap petrol he will buy some, however much is still in the tank. Examiner’s
Use

Whenever he buys petrol he always fills the tank and records the details in his log book, and
usually re-sets the trip recorder to 0.

The following table is an extract from Zaheer’s log book. The odometer records the total
distance in km travelled by the car since its manufacture. The trip recorder records the
distance in km travelled by the car since the trip recorder was last re-set to 0.

Odometer Trip recorder Petrol bought


Date
reading (km) reading (km) (litres)

July 5 16319 510 38.5

July 11 16824 505 39.5

July 15 17099 275 20.5

July 18 17584 485 37

July 22 17789 690 15

July 24 18084 295 23.5

July 25 18579 495 38.5

July 26 18799 220 18

(i) Estimate the capacity of the car’s petrol tank to the nearest 5 litres.

........................................ litres [1]

(ii) State the four dates on which Zaheer bought cheap petrol.

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) On one occasion when Zaheer bought petrol he forgot to re-set the trip recorder.

(a) State the date on which this happened.

................................................... [1]

(b) Find the actual distance travelled between this purchase and the next one.

........................................... km [1]

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10


19

The grid below gives petrol bought, in litres, on the x-axis, and distance travelled since For
previous purchase of petrol, in km, on the y-axis. Examiner’s
Use

700

600

500
Distance travelled (km)

400

300

200

100

0
0 10 20 30 40
Petrol bought (litres)

(iv) Plot on the grid the eight points corresponding to the occasions on which Zaheer
purchased petrol. [2]

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10 [Turn over


20

(v) Calculate the overall mean and the two semi-averages, and plot them on the grid. For
Examiner’s
Use

[6]

(vi) Draw a line of best fit through your plotted averages. [1]
(vii) Use your line of best fit to estimate

(a) the distance, to the nearest 10 km, which Zaheer could travel using 30 litres of
petrol,

........................................... km [1]

(b) the petrol consumption of Zaheer’s car, stating the units.

................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10


21

BLANK PAGE

[Question 11 is printed on the next page]

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10 [Turn over


22

11 (a) Research organisations in the United Kingdom often divide the population into six For
categories, called social classes, denoted by A, B, C1, C2, D and E. The percentages of Examiner’s
the population in the different social classes in the year 1987 are given in the following Use

table.

Class A and B C1 C2 D and E


Percentage 13 21 38 28

(i) Draw and label a pie-chart of radius 4 cm to represent these percentages.

[4]

(ii) By the year 2001, the population of the U.K. was 7% larger than it had been in 1987.
Calculate, to 2 decimal places, the radius of a corresponding pie chart representing
the 2001 population.

(You are not required to draw this chart.)

........................................... cm [4]

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10


23

(b) The following table gives, for each gender separately, the percentage of the U.K. For
population of working age in different occupational groups in the year 2002. Examiner’s
Use

Males (%) Females (%)

Professional 8 3

Managerial and Technical 27 24

Skilled (non-manual) 11 31

Skilled (manual) 27 7

Partly skilled and Unskilled 17 21

Others 10 14

‘Others’ included those in the Armed Forces, those who did not state their current or last
occupation, and those who had not worked in the previous eight years.

(i) Draw, on the grid below, fully-labelled percentage component bar charts for males
and females to illustrate the data in the table.

[4]

[Question 11 continues on the next page]

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10 [Turn over


24

(ii) Describe two differences between the occupations of males and females illustrated For
by the charts. Examiner’s
Use

..................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) State, with a reason, whether you would regard pie charts or bar charts as more
appropriate to compare these two sets of percentages.

..................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2010 4040/13/O/N/10


UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
General Certificate of Education Ordinary Level
* 2 1 3 7 9 7 3 6 3 4 *

STATISTICS 4040/12
Paper 1 October/November 2010
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper.
Additional Materials: Mathematical tables
Pair of compasses
Protractor

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions in Section A and not more than four questions from Section B.
If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
The use of an electronic calculator is expected in this paper.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.

DC (NF/SW) 34298
© UCLES 2010 [Turn over
2

Section A [36 marks]

Answer all of the questions 1 to 6.

1 In a class test, the marks of eleven pupils were as follows.

4 25 7 8 4 4 8 9 6 5 19

(i) For these marks, find

(a) the mode,

............................................................[1]

(b) the median,

............................................................[1]

(c) the mean.

............................................................[1]

(ii) State which one of these three quantities you would choose as the most appropriate measure
of central tendency (average) to represent these figures, and give a reason for rejecting one
of the other two.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

(iii) State (but do not calculate) which measure of dispersion (spread) you would use as the most
appropriate to represent these marks.

............................................................[1]

© UCLES 2010 4040/12/O/N/10


3

2 There are 34 pupils in a school class. Their method of travel to school is given in the following
table.

Method of travel Number of pupils


Car 7
Bus 10
Walk 7
Train 10

The data is to be illustrated by a pie chart of radius 4 cm.

(i) Calculate, to the nearest degree, the angles of the sectors representing Car and Bus.

Car ....................................................... °

Bus ....................................................... ° [2]

(ii) Draw and label the pie chart.

[2]

(iii) In another class there are 27 pupils. Calculate, correct to 1 decimal place, the radius of a
comparable pie chart to illustrate this class. You are NOT required to draw this pie chart.

.................................................... cm [2]
© UCLES 2010 4040/12/O/N/10 [Turn over
4

3 The diagram below shows how many pets (cat, dog, rabbit) are owned by each of 100 households.
No household owns more than one of each different animal.

Cat Dog

33
z 31

y
z z

x
2

Rabbit

(i) Interpret the value 31 in the diagram.

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

(ii) 72 households own only one pet. Find the value of x.

x = ...........................................................[1]

(iii) Three times as many households own only a cat as own all three types of pet. Find the value
of y.

y = ...........................................................[1]

© UCLES 2010 4040/12/O/N/10


5

(iv) Of the 100 households, 2 own no pet. Find the value of z.

z = ...........................................................[2]

(v) Find the number of households owning a dog.

............................................................[1]

© UCLES 2010 4040/12/O/N/10 [Turn over


6

4 The heights of the girls in a village were measured and are represented in the histogram below.

15

10

Frequency
density
5

0
0 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180
Height (cm)

There are 24 girls in the 155 – under 165 cm class.

(i) Complete the table below.

Height (cm) Number of girls

145 – under 150

150 – under 155

155 – under 165 24

165 – under 180

[4]

(ii) Use the histogram to estimate the modal height of the girls.

..................................................... cm [2]

© UCLES 2010 4040/12/O/N/10


7

5 Before an examination, teachers were required to predict the grades which their pupils would
obtain, from A (highest) to D (lowest). The following table shows the numbers of pupils for whom
the predicted grade was accurate.

Teacher’s predicted Grade obtained


grade A B C D

A 132

B 284

C 203

D 68

(i) Complete the table using the following information:

(a) Among pupils for whom grade C was predicted, 33 obtained grade B and 4 obtained
grade D.

[1]

(b) There were no pupils for whom the predicted grade and the grade obtained were more
than one grade apart.

[1]

(c) Of the candidates for whom grade D was predicted, one-third obtained grade C.

[1]

(d) Of the candidates for whom grade A was predicted, eleven times as many obtained
grade A as obtained grade B.

[1]

(e) There were 50 candidates for whom grade B was predicted but who obtained another
grade. Nine times as many obtained grade A as obtained grade C.

[1]

(ii) For all those pupils whose predicted grade was not accurate, state, with a reason, whether
the grade obtained was likely to be higher or lower than the predicted grade.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2010 4040/12/O/N/10 [Turn over


8

6 (a) On the grids below sketch the frequency curve of

(i) a distribution in which the mode is greater than the mean,

Frequency

Variable

[2]

(ii) a distribution in which the mean, median and mode are all equal.

Frequency

Variable

[2]

© UCLES 2010 4040/12/O/N/10


9

(b) A variable has the following frequency curve.

Frequency

1 2 3 4 5 6
Variable

On the grid below sketch the corresponding cumulative frequency curve.

Cumulative
frequency

1 2 3 4 5 6
Variable

[2]

© UCLES 2010 4040/12/O/N/10 [Turn over


10

Section B [64 marks]

Answer not more than four of the questions 7 to 11.

Each question in this section carries 16 marks.

7 (a) A man has three unbiased coins, one gold, one silver and one bronze.
In an experiment, the gold coin is tossed. If a head lands uppermost the experiment stops,
otherwise the silver coin is tossed. If a head on the silver coin lands uppermost the experiment
stops, otherwise the bronze coin is tossed.
On each toss of a coin, if a head lands uppermost, H is recorded, and if a tail lands uppermost,
T is recorded.

(i) State each of the possible sequences of outcome in the experiment together with its
probability.

[4]

(ii) The experiment is carried out twice. Calculate the probability that both experiments stop
with H being recorded.

............................................................[2]

(b) John and Zaheer play a game in which the player who starts the game has an advantage.
When John starts, the probability that he will win is 0.7. When Zaheer starts, the probability
that he will win is 0.8. All games end in a win for one player or the other.
They agree to play a number of games until one of them has won 3 games. Except for the first
game, each game is started by the loser of the previous game.

(i) State the maximum number of games which have to be played for one player to win three
games.

............................................................[1]

© UCLES 2010 4040/12/O/N/10


11

(ii) Calculate the probability that John will win by 3 games to 0 when

(a) John starts the first game,

............................................................[2]

(b) Zaheer starts the first game.

............................................................[2]

(iii) Denoting the event ‘John wins’ by J, and ‘Zaheer wins’ by Z

(a) write down the three different sequences of four results which lead to Zaheer winning
by 3 games to 1,

[2]

(b) calculate the probability that Zaheer wins by 3 games to 1, if John starts the first
game.

[3]

© UCLES 2010 4040/12/O/N/10 [Turn over


12

8 The table below gives certain information about the population and deaths in town X for the year
2008, together with the standard population of the area in which town X is situated.

Population in age Standard


Age group Deaths
group population (%)
0 – under 20 11 2600 25

20 – under 40 d 4500 30

40 – under 60 11 4400 25

60 and over 65 1300 20

(i) The death rate for the 20 – under 40 age group was 2 per thousand. Show that d = 9.

[1]

(ii) Calculate the death rates per thousand for the other three age groups.

................................................................

................................................................

............................................................[2]

(iii) Calculate the crude death rate per thousand for town X.

............................................................[4]

(iv) Using the given rate for the 20 – under 40 age group, and the rates you have calculated
in (ii), calculate, correct to 2 decimal places, the standardised death rate per thousand for
town X.

............................................................[4]
© UCLES 2010 4040/12/O/N/10
13

The table below gives information about town Y, another town in the same area as town X, for the
year 2008. The crude death rate for town Y in 2008 was 7.97 per thousand.

Death rate Population in age


Age group
per thousand group (%)
0 – under 20 4 35

20 – under 40 3 24

40 – under 60 5 22

60 and over 25 19

(v) Calculate the standardised death rate per thousand for town Y in the year 2008, using the
same standard population as for town X.

............................................................[2]

(vi) State, with a reason, which of the two towns would appear to have a healthier environment.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

For both town X and town Y, the standardised death rate is higher than the crude death rate.

(vii) State what this tells you about how their populations compare with the standard population.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2010 4040/12/O/N/10 [Turn over


14

9 A man travels to and from work by car. The following table shows the cost (in $) over a period of
160 working days.

Number of working days (x) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160

Cost ($) (y) 230 290 340 390 445 500 560 610

(i) Plot a scatter diagram of cost against number of working days on the grid below.

y
800

700

600

500

Cost
($) 400

300

200

100

0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 x
Number of working days
[2]

© UCLES 2010 4040/12/O/N/10


15

(ii) Calculate three appropriate averages using the data, plot them on the grid, and use them to
draw the line of best fit.

................................................................

................................................................

............................................................[6]

(iii) Obtain the equation of your line of best fit, giving the equation in the form y = mx + c.

............................................................[4]

(iv) Estimate the cost of travelling to and from work for 110 days.

$ ............................................................[1]

(v) If the man used public transport, the journey to and from work would cost him $5 per day.
On the grid, draw a line representing public transport cost against the number of working
days.

[1]

(vi) State the number of days after which the man would have spent the same amount whether
travelling by car or public transport.

............................................................[1]

(vii) Explain briefly why one of your lines passes through the origin, but the other does not.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2010 4040/12/O/N/10 [Turn over
16

10 The owner of a travelling shop noted how many kilometres he travelled on each of the 300 days on
which he worked during one particular year. He grouped his results as given in the following table.

Kilometres Number Class (m–25)


x=
travelled of days mid-points (m) 5

under 10 6

10 – under 20 13

20 – under 30 62

30 – under 40 96

40 – under 60 65

60 and over 58

The lowest and highest classes in the above table are ‘open-ended’.

(i) State, in each case with a reason, what you would regard as a suitable value to use for

(a) the lower limit of the lowest class,

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[2]

(b) the upper limit of the highest class.

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[2]

(ii) Using your answers to (i), write in the above table the class mid-points (m) of the six classes.
[2]

© UCLES 2010 4040/12/O/N/10


17

(iii) The values of m are scaled, by subtracting 25 and dividing by 5, to give values of x.

(a) Write the values of x in the table. [2]

(b) Estimate, to 3 significant figures, the mean and the standard deviation of the values of x.

Mean = ...............................................................

Standard deviation = ...........................................................[5]

(c) Use your results in (iii)(b) to estimate, to 3 significant figures, the mean and the standard
deviation of the number of kilometres travelled per day by the owner of the shop.

Mean = .................................................... km

Standard deviation = .................................................... km [3]

© UCLES 2010 4040/12/O/N/10 [Turn over


18

11 A company designed an aptitude test to gauge the suitability of people applying to join its workforce.
The following table summarises the time taken (in minutes) to complete the test by 88 applicants.

Time to complete test Number of Cumulative


(minutes) applicants frequency
10 – under 30 8

30 – under 40 12

40 – under 45 14

45 – under 50 13

50 – under 60 16

60 – under 80 16

80 – under 110 9

(i) Complete the cumulative frequency column in the above table. [2]

(ii) Plot the cumulative frequencies on the grid below, joining the points by a smooth curve.

100

80

60

Cumulative
frequency
40

20

0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Time (minutes)
[3]

© UCLES 2010 4040/12/O/N/10


19

(iii) Use your graph to estimate the median of the times taken to complete the test.

............................................ minutes [2]

Applicants who complete the test in under 37 minutes are invited to attend an interview.

(iv) Use your graph to estimate the percentage of these 88 applicants who were not invited for an
interview.

...................................................... % [4]

In addition to the 88 applicants referred to in the table, 11 others had failed to complete the test
after 110 minutes and were stopped from continuing with it.

(v) (a) Explain why, if these 11 applicants are included in the data, it is still possible to estimate
the interquartile range of the times taken to complete the test by all 99 applicants.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[2]

(b) Use your graph to estimate this interquartile range.

............................................ minutes [3]

© UCLES 2010 4040/12/O/N/10


20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2010 4040/12/O/N/10


UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
General Certificate of Education Ordinary Level
*7043613633*

STATISTICS 4040/11
Paper 1 October/November 2010
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper.
Additional Materials: Mathematical tables
Pair of compasses
Protractor

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions in Section A and not more than four questions from Section B.
If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
The use of an electronic calculator is expected in this paper.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.

DC (LEO/SW) 15799/6
© UCLES 2010 [Turn over
2

Section A [36 marks]

Answer all of the questions 1 to 6.

1 In a class test, the marks of eleven pupils were as follows.

4 25 7 8 4 4 8 9 6 5 19

(i) For these marks, find

(a) the mode,

............................................................[1]

(b) the median,

............................................................[1]

(c) the mean.

............................................................[1]

(ii) State which one of these three quantities you would choose as the most appropriate measure
of central tendency (average) to represent these figures, and give a reason for rejecting one
of the other two.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

(iii) State (but do not calculate) which measure of dispersion (spread) you would use as the most
appropriate to represent these marks.

............................................................[1]

© UCLES 2010 4040/11/O/N/10


3

2 There are 34 pupils in a school class. Their method of travel to school is given in the following
table.

Method of travel Number of pupils


Car 7
Bus 10
Walk 7
Train 10

The data is to be illustrated by a pie chart of radius 4 cm.

(i) Calculate, to the nearest degree, the angles of the sectors representing Car and Bus.

Car ....................................................... °

Bus ....................................................... ° [2]

(ii) Draw and label the pie chart.

[2]

(iii) In another class there are 27 pupils. Calculate, correct to 1 decimal place, the radius of a
comparable pie chart to illustrate this class. You are NOT required to draw this pie chart.

.................................................... cm [2]
© UCLES 2010 4040/11/O/N/10 [Turn over
4

3 The diagram below shows how many pets (cat, dog, rabbit) are owned by each of 100 households.
No household owns more than one of each different animal.

Cat Dog

33
z 31

y
z z

x
2

Rabbit

(i) Interpret the value 31 in the diagram.

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

(ii) 72 households own only one pet. Find the value of x.

x = ...........................................................[1]

(iii) Three times as many households own only a cat as own all three types of pet. Find the value
of y.

y = ...........................................................[1]

© UCLES 2010 4040/11/O/N/10


5

(iv) Of the 100 households, 2 own no pet. Find the value of z.

z = ...........................................................[2]

(v) Find the number of households owning a dog.

............................................................[1]

© UCLES 2010 4040/11/O/N/10 [Turn over


6

4 The heights of the girls in a village were measured and are represented in the histogram below.

15

10

Frequency
density
5

0
0 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180
Height (cm)

There are 24 girls in the 155 – under 165 cm class.

(i) Complete the table below.

Height (cm) Number of girls

145 – under 150

150 – under 155

155 – under 165 24

165 – under 180

[4]

(ii) Use the histogram to estimate the modal height of the girls.

..................................................... cm [2]

© UCLES 2010 4040/11/O/N/10


7

5 Before an examination, teachers were required to predict the grades which their pupils would
obtain, from A (highest) to D (lowest). The following table shows the numbers of pupils for whom
the predicted grade was accurate.

Teacher’s predicted Grade obtained


grade A B C D

A 132

B 284

C 203

D 68

(i) Complete the table using the following information:

(a) Among pupils for whom grade C was predicted, 33 obtained grade B and 4 obtained
grade D.

[1]

(b) There were no pupils for whom the predicted grade and the grade obtained were more
than one grade apart.

[1]

(c) Of the candidates for whom grade D was predicted, one-third obtained grade C.

[1]

(d) Of the candidates for whom grade A was predicted, eleven times as many obtained
grade A as obtained grade B.

[1]

(e) There were 50 candidates for whom grade B was predicted but who obtained another
grade. Nine times as many obtained grade A as obtained grade C.

[1]

(ii) For all those pupils whose predicted grade was not accurate, state, with a reason, whether
the grade obtained was likely to be higher or lower than the predicted grade.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2010 4040/11/O/N/10 [Turn over


8

6 (a) On the grids below sketch the frequency curve of

(i) a distribution in which the mode is greater than the mean,

Frequency

Variable

[2]

(ii) a distribution in which the mean, median and mode are all equal.

Frequency

Variable

[2]

© UCLES 2010 4040/11/O/N/10


9

(b) A variable has the following frequency curve.

Frequency

1 2 3 4 5 6
Variable

On the grid below sketch the corresponding cumulative frequency curve.

Cumulative
frequency

1 2 3 4 5 6
Variable

[2]

© UCLES 2010 4040/11/O/N/10 [Turn over


10

Section B [64 marks]

Answer not more than four of the questions 7 to 11.

Each question in this section carries 16 marks.

7 (a) A man has three unbiased coins, one gold, one silver and one bronze.
In an experiment, the gold coin is tossed. If a head lands uppermost the experiment stops,
otherwise the silver coin is tossed. If a head on the silver coin lands uppermost the experiment
stops, otherwise the bronze coin is tossed.
On each toss of a coin, if a head lands uppermost, H is recorded, and if a tail lands uppermost,
T is recorded.

(i) State each of the possible sequences of outcome in the experiment together with its
probability.

[4]

(ii) The experiment is carried out twice. Calculate the probability that both experiments stop
with H being recorded.

............................................................[2]

(b) John and Zaheer play a game in which the player who starts the game has an advantage.
When John starts, the probability that he will win is 0.7. When Zaheer starts, the probability
that he will win is 0.8. All games end in a win for one player or the other.
They agree to play a number of games until one of them has won 3 games. Except for the first
game, each game is started by the loser of the previous game.

(i) State the maximum number of games which have to be played for one player to win three
games.

............................................................[1]

© UCLES 2010 4040/11/O/N/10


11

(ii) Calculate the probability that John will win by 3 games to 0 when

(a) John starts the first game,

............................................................[2]

(b) Zaheer starts the first game.

............................................................[2]

(iii) Denoting the event ‘John wins’ by J, and ‘Zaheer wins’ by Z

(a) write down the three different sequences of four results which lead to Zaheer winning
by 3 games to 1,

[2]

(b) calculate the probability that Zaheer wins by 3 games to 1, if John starts the first
game.

[3]

© UCLES 2010 4040/11/O/N/10 [Turn over


12

8 The table below gives certain information about the population and deaths in town X for the year
2008, together with the standard population of the area in which town X is situated.

Population in age Standard


Age group Deaths
group population (%)
0 – under 20 11 2600 25

20 – under 40 d 4500 30

40 – under 60 11 4400 25

60 and over 65 1300 20

(i) The death rate for the 20 – under 40 age group was 2 per thousand. Show that d = 9.

[1]

(ii) Calculate the death rates per thousand for the other three age groups.

................................................................

................................................................

............................................................[2]

(iii) Calculate the crude death rate per thousand for town X.

............................................................[4]

(iv) Using the given rate for the 20 – under 40 age group, and the rates you have calculated
in (ii), calculate, correct to 2 decimal places, the standardised death rate per thousand for
town X.

............................................................[4]
© UCLES 2010 4040/11/O/N/10
13

The table below gives information about town Y, another town in the same area as town X, for the
year 2008. The crude death rate for town Y in 2008 was 7.97 per thousand.

Death rate Population in age


Age group
per thousand group (%)
0 – under 20 4 35

20 – under 40 3 24

40 – under 60 5 22

60 and over 25 19

(v) Calculate the standardised death rate per thousand for town Y in the year 2008, using the
same standard population as for town X.

............................................................[2]

(vi) State, with a reason, which of the two towns would appear to have a healthier environment.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

For both town X and town Y, the standardised death rate is higher than the crude death rate.

(vii) State what this tells you about how their populations compare with the standard population.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2010 4040/11/O/N/10 [Turn over


14

9 A man travels to and from work by car. The following table shows the cost (in $) over a period of
160 working days.

Number of working days (x) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160

Cost ($) (y) 230 290 340 390 445 500 560 610

(i) Plot a scatter diagram of cost against number of working days on the grid below.

y
800

700

600

500

Cost
($) 400

300

200

100

0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 x
Number of working days
[2]

© UCLES 2010 4040/11/O/N/10


15

(ii) Calculate three appropriate averages using the data, plot them on the grid, and use them to
draw the line of best fit.

................................................................

................................................................

............................................................[6]

(iii) Obtain the equation of your line of best fit, giving the equation in the form y = mx + c.

............................................................[4]

(iv) Estimate the cost of travelling to and from work for 110 days.

$ ............................................................[1]

(v) If the man used public transport, the journey to and from work would cost him $5 per day.
On the grid, draw a line representing public transport cost against the number of working
days.

[1]

(vi) State the number of days after which the man would have spent the same amount whether
travelling by car or public transport.

............................................................[1]

(vii) Explain briefly why one of your lines passes through the origin, but the other does not.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2010 4040/11/O/N/10 [Turn over
16

10 The owner of a travelling shop noted how many kilometres he travelled on each of the 300 days on
which he worked during one particular year. He grouped his results as given in the following table.

Kilometres Number Class (m–25)


x=
travelled of days mid-points (m) 5

under 10 6

10 – under 20 13

20 – under 30 62

30 – under 40 96

40 – under 60 65

60 and over 58

The lowest and highest classes in the above table are ‘open-ended’.

(i) State, in each case with a reason, what you would regard as a suitable value to use for

(a) the lower limit of the lowest class,

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[2]

(b) the upper limit of the highest class.

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[2]

(ii) Using your answers to (i), write in the above table the class mid-points (m) of the six classes.
[2]

© UCLES 2010 4040/11/O/N/10


17

(iii) The values of m are scaled, by subtracting 25 and dividing by 5, to give values of x.

(a) Write the values of x in the table. [2]

(b) Estimate, to 3 significant figures, the mean and the standard deviation of the values of x.

Mean = ...............................................................

Standard deviation = ...........................................................[5]

(c) Use your results in (iii)(b) to estimate, to 3 significant figures, the mean and the standard
deviation of the number of kilometres travelled per day by the owner of the shop.

Mean = .................................................... km

Standard deviation = .................................................... km [3]

© UCLES 2010 4040/11/O/N/10 [Turn over


18

11 A company designed an aptitude test to gauge the suitability of people applying to join its workforce.
The following table summarises the time taken (in minutes) to complete the test by 88 applicants.

Time to complete test Number of Cumulative


(minutes) applicants frequency
10 – under 30 8

30 – under 40 12

40 – under 45 14

45 – under 50 13

50 – under 60 16

60 – under 80 16

80 – under 110 9

(i) Complete the cumulative frequency column in the above table. [2]

(ii) Plot the cumulative frequencies on the grid below, joining the points by a smooth curve.

100

80

60

Cumulative
frequency
40

20

0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Time (minutes)
[3]

© UCLES 2010 4040/11/O/N/10


19

(iii) Use your graph to estimate the median of the times taken to complete the test.

............................................ minutes [2]

Applicants who complete the test in under 37 minutes are invited to attend an interview.

(iv) Use your graph to estimate the percentage of these 88 applicants who were not invited for an
interview.

...................................................... % [4]

In addition to the 88 applicants referred to in the table, 11 others had failed to complete the test
after 110 minutes and were stopped from continuing with it.

(v) (a) Explain why, if these 11 applicants are included in the data, it is still possible to estimate
the interquartile range of the times taken to complete the test by all 99 applicants.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[2]

(b) Use your graph to estimate this interquartile range.

............................................ minutes [3]

© UCLES 2010 4040/11/O/N/10


20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2010 4040/11/O/N/10


UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
General Certificate of Education Ordinary Level
* 5 8 2 3 8 7 8 8 1 2 *

STATISTICS 4040/13
Paper 1 October/November 2013
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper.
Additional Materials: Pair of compasses
Protractor

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions in Section A and not more than four questions from Section B.
If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
The use of an electronic calculator is expected in this paper.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.

DC (CW/CGW) 66919/2
© UCLES 2013 [Turn over
2

Section A [36 marks] For


Examiner’s
Answer all of the questions 1 to 6. Use

1 A survey was carried out to discover whether the quantity of traffic on a busy road was
sufficient to justify the installation of a pedestrian crossing. At intervals throughout one day
an investigator recorded the number of vehicles passing the proposed location in periods of
30 seconds duration.

The numbers he recorded were:

12 51 64 55 51 61 31 22 „ 20 15 34 14 69 35

When his record sheet was examined the number shown here as „ was illegible, but it was
certainly a single-digit number.

Although this number is unknown, name, but do not calculate,

(i) two measures of central tendency (average) which can still be found,

.......................................................

................................................... [2]

(ii) one measure of dispersion which can still be found,

................................................... [1]

(iii) one measure of central tendency (average) which cannot be found,

................................................... [1]

(iv) two measures of dispersion which cannot be found.

.......................................................

................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2013 4040/13/O/N/13


3

2 The pie chart below illustrates the distribution by location of the total net profit of $787 million For
earned by an international company in the year 2011. Examiner’s
Use

Asia
North
America

Rest
of the
Europe World

(i) Measure, to the nearest degree, the sector angles of the pie chart, and insert them in
the appropriate places on the chart.
[2]

(ii) Calculate, to the nearest $million, the net profit of the company in Asia.

$ ...................................... million [1]

(iii) Measure and state the radius, in centimetres, of the above pie chart.

............................................. cm [1]

The total net profit of the same company in the year 2005 was $523 million.

(iv) Calculate, correct to 2 significant figures, the radius, in centimetres, of the comparable
pie chart for 2005.

............................................ cm [2]

© UCLES 2013 4040/13/O/N/13 [Turn over


4

3 A factory employs both male and female staff in each of the three categories managerial, For
inspection and production. Examiner’s
Use

There are altogether 3500 employees, of whom 2150 are male. There are a total of 660
managerial staff, 540 male inspection staff and 785 female production staff.

(i) Insert these values in the appropriate places in the following table.

Managerial Inspection Production TOTAL


Male
Female
TOTAL
[1]

Two thirds of the managerial staff are female.

(ii) Use this further information to complete the table.

[5]

© UCLES 2013 4040/13/O/N/13


5

4 There are 50 girls in their final year at a school. The diagram below illustrates the number of For
the girls who play each of the sports badminton, volleyball and handball. Examiner’s
Use

Badminton Volleyball

5 6 11

9
7 8

Handball
x

(i) Calculate the value of x, and state what it represents.

x = ......................................................

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Find

(a) how many more girls play volleyball than play handball,

................................................... [1]

(b) how many more girls play exactly two sports than play exactly one sport.

................................................... [1]

Half of the girls who play volleyball and two thirds of the girls who play only handball say they
intend to continue playing sport after they have left school.

(iii) Find the number of girls who intend to continue playing sport after they have left school.

................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2013 4040/13/O/N/13 [Turn over


6

5 In answering this question you are not required to draw a histogram. For
Examiner’s
The times taken, in minutes, by 174 people to complete an aptitude test are summarised in Use

the following table.

Number of Height of rectangle


Time (minutes)
people (units)
10 – under 30 28
30 – under 40 36 18
40 – under 45 40
45 – under 50 32
50 – under 75 20
75 – under 120 18
TOTAL 174

The times are to be illustrated by a histogram, in which the 30 – under 40 class is represented
by a rectangle of height 18 units.

(i) Calculate the height of the rectangle representing the 40 – under 45 class, and insert
the value in the table.

[1]

(ii) Calculate the heights of the rectangles representing the remaining four classes, and
insert the values in the table.

[3]

(iii) If the final two classes were combined into a single 50 – under 120 class, calculate, to
2 decimal places, the height of the rectangle which would represent the combined class.

................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2013 4040/13/O/N/13


7

6 (a) (i) Describe the situation which can lead to the method of systematic sampling For
producing a biased sample. Examiner’s
Use

..................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) There are 380 students at a college. It is proposed to take a systematic sample of
20 of the students. Explain briefly how this could be achieved.

..................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) Briefly explain how a population could be stratified, prior to taking a stratified sample, in
order to ascertain the views of members of the public on

(i) a proposed increase in the tax on tobacco products,

..................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) aircraft noise.

..................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2013 4040/13/O/N/13 [Turn over


8

Section B [64 marks] For


Examiner’s
Answer not more than four of the questions 7 to 11. Use

Each question in this section carries 16 marks.

7 (a) A test for a particular disease has a 95% chance of correctly giving a positive result for a
person who has the disease, but a 10% chance of incorrectly giving a positive result for
a person who does not have the disease.

(i) Find the chance that the test gives a negative result for a person who has the
disease, and insert it in the following table.

Person has Person does not


the disease have the disease
P(test result positive) 0.95
P(test result negative)
[1]

(ii) Complete the table.

[1]

15% of the people who are tested are believed to have the disease.

A person is chosen at random and tested.

(iii) Calculate the probability that the test gives a correct result for this person.

................................................... [4]

© UCLES 2013 4040/13/O/N/13


9

(b) Give all probabilities in this part of the question as fractions. For
Examiner’s
The following diagram classifies the members of a tennis club as to whether they are Use

male or female, left-handed or right-handed, and whether or not they have represented
the club in matches.

Left-handed Right-handed

Male 5 represented club


Represented club 7

1 5

3 4
Female
0 8

A member of the club is chosen at random.

(i) Calculate the probability that this member has represented the club in matches.

................................................... [1]

A female member is chosen at random.

(ii) Calculate the probability that she is right-handed.

................................................... [2]

A member who has represented the club in matches is chosen at random.

(iii) Calculate the probability that this member is left-handed.

................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2013 4040/13/O/N/13 [Turn over


10

(c) Laura walks to school. On her route she passes two shops, A and B. The probability that For
she will go into shop A on any morning is 0.2, and into shop B is 0.7. Examiner’s
Her decision of whether to go into one of the shops is independent of whether she goes Use

into the other shop. If she goes into either or both shops the probability that she will be
late for school is 0.09.

(i) Calculate the probability that on any morning she will go into exactly one shop and
be late for school.

................................................... [3]

Laura has been told that she must aim to be late on no more than 5% of the schooldays
on which she goes into exactly one shop.

(ii) State, with a reason, whether she is likely to achieve this target.

..................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2013 4040/13/O/N/13


11

8 (a) The table below summarises information about the number of GCE O Level subjects For
passed by different numbers of pupils at a school in the year 2011. Examiner’s
Use

Number of subjects (x) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6


Number of pupils (frequency) 1 3 6 12 15 10 7
Cumulative frequency 1 4 10 22 37 47 54

An appropriate cumulative frequency graph is to be drawn to represent these data.

(i) On the grid below, draw and label two axes, the horizontal axis representing the
number of subjects passed and the vertical axis representing cumulative frequency.

[2]

(ii) Draw an appropriate cumulative frequency graph to represent these data.

[4]

© UCLES 2013 4040/13/O/N/13 [Turn over


12

(b) The cumulative frequency graph below illustrates the lengths of journey times, in For
minutes, to their homes of a number of students at a college at the end of one particular Examiner’s
day. Use

200

160

120
Cumulative
frequency

80

40

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Journey time (minutes)

Use the graph to estimate

(i) the median journey time,

.................................... minutes [1]

(ii) the lower quartile time,

..................................... minutes [1]

(iii) the 90th percentile time,

..................................... minutes [1]

(iv) the number of students whose journey time was longer than 23 minutes,

................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2013 4040/13/O/N/13


13

(v) the percentile corresponding to a journey time of 17 minutes. For


Examiner’s
Use

................................................... [2]

On the next day, due to bad weather, the journey time of all students was 5 minutes
longer than the original times illustrated in the graph.

Compared with the original times, state, without further calculation, the effect which the
bad weather had on

(vi) the upper quartile journey time,

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(vii) the interquartile range of journey times.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2013 4040/13/O/N/13 [Turn over


14

9 The following table gives information about the populations and deaths in two towns, A and For
B, during the course of one year, together with the standard population of the area in which Examiner’s
both towns are situated. Use

Town A Town B
Standard
Age Death rate
Population Deaths Population Deaths population
(per thousand)
0 – under 15 5000 45 p= 6000 66 400
15 – under 45 3750 15 4 27000 54 300
45 – under 65 2500 25 10 15000 60 200
65 and over 1250 q= 32 2000 30 100

(i) For town A, calculate the values of p and of q and insert them in the table.

[2]

(ii) Calculate the crude death rate of town B.

................................................... [4]

(iii) Calculate the standardised death rate of town B.

................................................... [4]

(iv) Use the population figures given in the table to state why the crude death rate and the
standardised death rate of town A are equal.

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2013 4040/13/O/N/13


15

The table shows that far more deaths occurred in town B than in town A during the year, For
and yet the standardised death rate for town B is much lower than that for town A. Examiner’s
Use

(v) Give two reasons why this situation has occurred.

..................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

It was subsequently discovered that a small number of inhabitants of town B, none of


whom had died during the year, had been misclassified by being included incorrectly in
the 45 – under 65 class, when in fact they were all 65 and over.

(vi) State, with a reason, the effect, if any, which correcting this error would have on the
crude death rate of town B.

..................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2013 4040/13/O/N/13 [Turn over


16

10 The time, in minutes, taken by each of 6 children to walk 1 kilometre, is given in the following For
table. Examiner’s
Use

Child A B C D E F
Age in years (x) 13 8 7 15 12 9
Time in minutes (y) 12 23 25 11 18 23

(i) Plot these data on the grid below.

y
30

20

Time
(minutes)

10

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 x
Age (years)
[2]

(ii) Calculate the overall mean and the two semi-averages of the data, and plot them on
your graph.

[5]

© UCLES 2013 4040/13/O/N/13


17

(iii) Use your plotted averages to draw a line of best fit. [1] For
Examiner’s
(iv) Using any valid method, obtain the equation of your line of best fit, and write it in the Use

form y = mx + c.

................................................... [3]

(v) Use your equation to estimate, to the nearest minute, the time taken to walk 1 kilometre
by a child aged 14 years.

................................................... [1]

(vi) (a) Comment on how well your line of best fit matches the data points.

..................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) From the graph, identify the child for whom your line of best fit most overestimates
the time taken.

................................................... [1]

(vii) State, with a reason, whether it would be valid to use your line of best fit to estimate the
time taken to walk 1 kilometre by a person whose age is outside the range of values
given in the table.

..................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2013 4040/13/O/N/13 [Turn over


18

11 The following table summarises the increase, in dollars, of the annual income of a sample of For
200 people between the years 2006 and 2011 (a negative value indicates a decrease). Examiner’s
Use

Increase in annual Class mid- Frequency


y = m – 750 fy fy 2
income ($x) point (m) 250 (f )
–2500 – under 0 14
0 – under 1500 99
1500 – under 2500 39
2500 – under 5000 25
5000 – under 10000 23
TOTAL 200

(i) Obtain the mid-point, m, for each of the five classes and insert the values in the table.

[1]

(ii) For each class, obtain the value of the scaled variable, y, where

y = m – 750 ,
250
and insert the values of y in the table.

[2]

© UCLES 2013 4040/13/O/N/13


19

(iii) Obtain the values of Σfy and Σfy 2 and use them to estimate the values of the mean of y For
and the variance of y. Examiner’s
Use

Mean = ......................................................

Variance = .................................................. [7]

(iv) Use your results from part (iii) to estimate

(a) the mean of x,

................................................... [2]

(b) the variance of x.

................................................... [3]

(v) State the units of the variance of x.

................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2013 4040/13/O/N/13


20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2013 4040/13/O/N/13


UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
General Certificate of Education Ordinary Level
* 0 1 9 2 7 3 6 8 8 2 *

STATISTICS 4040/12
Paper 1 October/November 2013
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper.
Additional Materials: Pair of compasses
Protractor

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions in Section A and not more than four questions from Section B.
If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
The use of an electronic calculator is expected in this paper.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.

DC (NH/CGW) 66916/2
© UCLES 2013 [Turn over
2

Section A [36 marks] For


Examiner’s
Answer all of the questions 1 to 6. Use

1 Seven statistical measures are

mean,
median,
mode,
range,
interquartile range,
variance
and standard deviation.

In each of the following situations, one of these measures is to be found by the person
described. State the appropriate measure in each case.

(i) A doctor finds the most common age of her patients.

................................................... [1]

(ii) An athlete who competes in the 100 metres sprint finds the difference between his
slowest and quickest practice times.

................................................... [1]

(iii) A graduate who seeks employment with a company finds a measure of central tendency
for the salaries of the company’s employees. The company has twenty employees, of
whom three are managers earning salaries very much higher than the other employees.

................................................... [1]

(iv) A teacher finds a measure of dispersion for the scores of her pupils in a test, in which no
pupil scored an exceptionally high mark, and no pupil scored an exceptionally low mark.

................................................... [1]

(v) A biologist finds a measure of dispersion for the growth of twelve plants over a period of
three months. Two plants have been attacked by insects and have grown very much less
than the others.

................................................... [1]

(vi) A sociologist finds a measure of central tendency for the first names given to the male
babies born in a hospital over a period of six months.

................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2013 4040/12/O/N/13


3

2 A large keep fit class for women is held at a sports club once every week. The manager of For
the club asks the class instructor to select a sample of size 10 from the class. Examiner’s
Use

(i) State the method of sampling used if the instructor decides to select

(a) the first 10 women to arrive at the class,

................................................... [1]

(b) women at regular intervals from the class register.

................................................... [1]

The sample is required to obtain responses to a proposal to change the time of the class from
Monday evening to Monday afternoon. For class members the only items of data presently
available to the instructor are name and age.

(ii) State, and justify, two other items of data relating to class members which the instructor
needs to know when selecting the sample in order to avoid bias in responses. You are
not required to describe how the sample is selected.

..........................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [4]

© UCLES 2013 4040/12/O/N/13 [Turn over


4

3 In a photographic equipment store a record was kept of the number of cameras sold each For
day. The values, for eleven consecutive days, were as follows. Examiner’s
Use

6 0 8 2 1 6 0 9 6 4 1

For these values find

(i) the mode,

................................................... [1]

(ii) the mean, correct to one decimal place,

................................................... [2]

(iii) the median.

................................................... [2]

The values recorded for the next three days were x, x + 1 and x + 2.

(iv) If the median for the entire fourteen-day period was the same as the median for the first
eleven days, find x.

x = .................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2013 4040/12/O/N/13


5

4 The diagram below shows the number of actors at a film festival who have worked in one or For
more of the cities Mumbai, Los Angeles and Rome. Examiner’s
Use

Mumbai Los Angeles

13 5 9

4
3 6

Rome

(i) Find the number of actors who have worked in Mumbai.

................................................... [1]

(ii) Interpret the value 6 in the diagram.

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

A journalist selects one of these actors at random for interview.

Find the probability of selecting an actor who has worked in

(iii) Mumbai or Los Angeles or both,

................................................... [2]

(iv) Los Angeles and Rome,

................................................... [1]

(v) Rome, given that the actor has worked in Mumbai and Los Angeles.

................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2013 4040/12/O/N/13 [Turn over


6

5 In this question you are not required to draw any charts. For
Examiner’s
A charity, Camfam, classifies the income it receives under the headings Special Events, Use

Donations, Grants, and Other Sources. In Camfam’s report for 2010, the following percentage
bar chart was given, which represents a total income of $80 million.

2010

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Percentage

Special Events Donations Grants Other Sources

(i) Find the income which Camfam received in 2010 from Grants.

$ ................................................... [2]

(ii) If a pie chart were to be drawn to represent this information, find the angle which would
represent the sector for Special Events.

................................................... [2]

Camfam’s total income in 2011 was $60 million.


Two pie charts, one for 2010 and one for 2011, are to be presented together in a new report.

(iii) Find, in its simplest terms, the ratio of the area of the chart representing 2010 to the
area of the chart representing 2011.

................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2013 4040/12/O/N/13


7

6 The following table is to show the distance, in kilometres, between any two of the five towns For
A, B, C, D and E. Examiner’s
Use
A

42 B

20 39 D

36 18 25 E

For example, the distance between B and D is 39 km.

(i) Complete the table using the following information.

(a) The distance between B and C is 10 km more than the distance between D and E.

[1]

(b) The distance between A and C is two thirds of the distance between A and E.

[1]

(c) The distance between A and B is twice the distance between C and E.

[1]

(d) C is 19 km further from D than B is from E.

[1]

Dimitri lives in town A, but has one friend in each of the towns D and E. He makes a journey
in which he leaves his home, visits each of these friends once, and then returns home.

(ii) Find the distance which Dimitri travels to complete the journey.

............................................. km [2]

© UCLES 2013 4040/12/O/N/13 [Turn over


8

Section B [64 marks] For


Examiner’s
Answer not more than four of the questions 7 to 11. Use

Each question in this section carries 16 marks.

7 In this question the fertility rate of a population is defined as the number of births per 1000
females.

The table below gives information about the female population and age group fertility rates in
a particular city for the year 2012, together with the standard population of the area in which
the city is situated.

Age group of Population of Age group Standard population


Births
females females in age group fertility rate of females (%)
Under 20 2900 50 18
20 – 29 4500 184 22
30 – 39 5250 136 25
Over 39 5800 15 35

(i) Calculate, to 1 decimal place, the standardised fertility rate for the city.

................................................... [4]

(ii) Calculate the number of births for each age group and insert the values in the table
above.

[2]

© UCLES 2013 4040/12/O/N/13


9

(iii) Calculate, to 1 decimal place, the crude fertility rate for the city. For
Examiner’s
Use

................................................... [4]

There are equal numbers of males and females in the city and in the standard population.
The standardised and crude death rates for the city in 2012 were 8.5 and 7.8 per thousand
of the population respectively.

(iv) Using one of these values, and any other appropriate values from parts (i), (ii) and (iii),
find the increase in the population of the city in 2012 due to births and deaths.

................................................... [5]

It is not possible to obtain an accurate measure of population increase or decrease in a city


from information on births and deaths alone.

(v) State what additional information is required.

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2013 4040/12/O/N/13 [Turn over


10

8 In a large residential building there are 120 apartments, of which 50 are private apartments For
(owned by the residents) and 70 are company apartments (owned by the company which Examiner’s
constructed the building). Use

If two apartments are chosen at random, find the probability of choosing

(i) two private apartments,

................................................... [2]

(ii) at least one company apartment.

................................................... [2]

The weekly rents, in dollars, charged on the company apartments are represented in the
histogram below, from which one rectangle, representing the $400 to under $500 class, has
been omitted.

25

20

15
Number
of
apartments
per $50
10

0
200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Weekly rent ($)

© UCLES 2013 4040/12/O/N/13


11

Use the histogram to find the number of company apartments for which the weekly rent was For
Examiner’s
(iii) from $250 to under $400, Use

................................................... [2]

(iv) from $225 to under $250.

................................................... [2]

There were 10 company apartments for which the weekly rent was from $400 to under $500.

(v) Complete the histogram by drawing on the grid the rectangle representing
the $400 to under $500 class.

[1]

(vi) Write down the term used to describe the $300 to under $350 class.

................................................... [1]

The private apartments are of three different sizes. There are 24 apartments with three
rooms, 14 with four rooms, and 12 with five rooms.
A safety expert, conducting a survey on the use of smoke detectors, chooses three private
apartments at random.

(vii) If the apartments chosen have 12 rooms in total, find the probability that the apartments
are all of the same size.

................................................... [6]
© UCLES 2013 4040/12/O/N/13 [Turn over
12

9 The mid-day temperature at a particular location in a city was measured every day throughout For
the year 2010. The following table summarises the results obtained. Examiner’s
Use

Temperature (°C) Number of days Cumulative frequency


0 – under 5 8
5 – under 10 25
10 – under 15 52
15 – under 20 81
20 – under 25 79
25 – under 30 68
30 – under 35 37
35 – under 40 15

(i) Complete the cumulative frequency column in the above table. [2]

(ii) Plot the cumulative frequencies on the grid opposite, joining the points by a smooth
curve. [3]

(iii) Use your graph to estimate

(a) the median of these temperatures,

.............................................. °C [1]

(b) the interquartile range of these temperatures.

.............................................. °C [4]

© UCLES 2013 4040/12/O/N/13


13

For
Examiner’s
400 Use

350

300
Cumulative frequency (days)

250

200

150

100

50

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
Temperature (°C)

© UCLES 2013 4040/12/O/N/13 [Turn over


14

When the results were obtained, a scientist predicted that, because of climate change, For
temperatures in the city would increase at the rate of 0.5 °C every ten years. Examiner’s
Assume that this prediction is accurate. Use

For this particular location,

(iv) use your answers to part (iii) to estimate, for the year 2050,

(a) the median of the mid-day temperatures,

........................................°C [2]

(b) the interquartile range of the mid-day temperatures,

........................................°C [1]

(v) use your graph to estimate, for the period 2010 to 2050, the increase in the number of
days with a mid-day temperature of more than 36 °C.

................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2013 4040/12/O/N/13


15

BLANK PAGE

[Turn over for Question 10]

© UCLES 2013 4040/12/O/N/13 [Turn over


16

10 Emilie, a student teacher, conducted research on the number of pupils and the number For
of teachers in the schools in the town of Astra, where she lives. The schools supplied the Examiner’s
following data. Use

School A B C D E F G H
Number of pupils, x 760 1219 927 470 1361 628 381 1085
Number of teachers, y 29 44 33 34 52 24 16 40

(i) Plot these data on the grid below.

y
60

50

40

Number
of 30
teachers

20

10

0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 x
Number of pupils
[2]

© UCLES 2013 4040/12/O/N/13


17

The data have an overall mean of (853.875, 34) and an upper semi-average of (1148, 42.25). For
Examiner’s
(ii) Show how the value 1148 is calculated. Use

[2]

(iii) Find the lower semi-average.

................................................... [2]

(iv) Without plotting the averages, and without drawing the line, find the equation of the
line of best fit in the form y = mx + c.

................................................... [3]

(v) Explain briefly why the value of c which you have found in part (iv) might give you
cause for concern.

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

Emilie discovered later that the data supplied by one of the schools gave, incorrectly, the
total number of people employed by the school, and not the number of teachers.

(vi) Ignoring the point representing the school which supplied incorrect data, draw, by eye,
on the grid in part (i), a line of best fit through the remaining seven points. [1]

(vii) Use the line you have drawn in part (vi) to find its equation in the form y = mx + c.

................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2013 4040/12/O/N/13 [Turn over


18

Emilie repeated the research for schools in the nearby town of Belport, for which she found For
the equation of the line of best fit to be y = 0.0431x + 1.72 . Examiner’s
Use

(viii) Using this equation, and your answer to part (vii), state in which of the two towns a pupil
might choose to be educated, if free to choose. Explain your answer briefly.

..........................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2013 4040/12/O/N/13


19

11 (i) Give one advantage and one disadvantage of forming a large set of data into a grouped For
frequency distribution. Examiner’s
Use

Advantage.........................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................

Disadvantage ....................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

The presenter of a radio programme, in which recordings of popular songs are played, plans
his programme. For each song chosen he writes down the song length, in terms of time, in
minutes, taken to play the song. The following table summarises the song lengths.

Song length Number


(minutes) of songs
2.8 – under 3.2 3
3.2 – under 3.4 5
3.4 – under 3.6 9
3.6 – under 3.8 8
3.8 – under 4.0 7
4.0 – under 4.2 4
4.2 – under 4.6 2

(ii) Estimate, in minutes, the mean and standard deviation of these song lengths. Give your
answers to 3 significant figures.

Mean = ......................................................

Standard deviation = .................................................. [8]

© UCLES 2013 4040/12/O/N/13 [Turn over


20

Information about five of the presenter’s earlier programmes is shown below. For
Examiner’s
Use
Number of songs Mean of song lengths Standard deviation of
Programme
played (minutes) song lengths (minutes)
P 38 3.70 0.339
Q 39 3.52 0.328
R 42 3.69 0.294
S 37 3.83 0.305
T 38 3.74 0.291

(iii) State in which of the programmes P, Q, R, S or T, songs were generally

(a) shortest in length,

................................................... [1]

(b) most similar in length.

................................................... [1]

All the presenter’s programmes are three hours in duration. Songs are not played continuously
throughout each programme; for some of the time the presenter talks about the songs and
the singers.

A listener switched on programme P at a random time during its transmission.

(iv) Find the probability that a song was not being played at that moment.

................................................... [4]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2013 4040/12/O/N/13


UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
General Certificate of Education Ordinary Level
* 9 9 2 5 4 1 2 3 6 3 *

STATISTICS 4040/13
Paper 1 October/November 2012
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper.
Additional Materials: Pair of compasses
Protractor

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions in Section A and not more than four questions from Section B.
If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
The use of an electronic calculator is expected in this paper.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.

DC (RW/JG) 51082/2
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
2

Section A [36 marks] For


Examiner’s
Answer all of the questions 1 to 6. Use

1 State, in each case, the name of a method of sampling which fits the given description.

(i) A method which never requires a sampling frame.

................................................... [1]

(ii) A method which only requires the use of random numbers to select the first item in a
sample.

................................................... [1]

(iii) A method which guarantees that the proportions of different categories in a sample will
exactly match those in the population being sampled.

................................................... [1]

(iv) A method which may produce a biased sample if there is some pattern in the population
which repeats at regular intervals.

................................................... [1]

(v) A method in which, at the start of sampling, all items in the population have an equal
chance of being selected for the sample.

................................................... [1]

(vi) A method in which, if a selected person or item is unavailable or cannot be located, a


replacement person or item is selected.

................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2012 4040/13/O/N/12


3

2 A group of children are given a general knowledge test, and the following table gives, for ten For
of them, their age in months and their score in the test. Each child is identified by a letter in Examiner’s
the range A to J. Use

Child A B C D E F G H I J
Age (months) 148 174 126 180 160 108 138 192 158 189
Test score 60 72 36 82 61 20 40 86 50 81

The line of best fit method is to be used to estimate a child’s test score from his/her age.

(i) State, with a reason, which of age and test score should be used as the independent
variable (x) and which as the dependent variable (y).

..........................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) State, with a reason, the letters corresponding to the children whose ages and scores
you would use to calculate the lower semi-average.

..........................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) Calculate and state the values of the lower semi-average.

[2]

© UCLES 2012 4040/13/O/N/12 [Turn over


4

3 It is required to obtain the equation of the line of best fit of two variables, x and y, in the form For
y = mx + c. Examiner’s
Use

Observations are taken on the two variables and the two semi-averages are calculated.

Lower semi-average (2.55, 8.05)


Upper semi-average (9.05, 21.05)

(i) Use the two semi-averages to obtain the value of m.

m = .................................................. [2]

The overall mean is calculated to be (5.80, 14.55).

(ii) Use your value of m from part (i) and the overall mean to obtain the value of c, and
hence state the equation of the line of best fit.

................................................... [3]

(iii) State the reason why the same equation would have been obtained if the overall mean
and a semi-average had been used to obtain the value of m.

..........................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2012 4040/13/O/N/12


5

4 The table below summarises the number of unsuccessful attempts which a sample of 100 For
people made before passing their driving test. Examiner’s
Use

Number of unsuccessful
Number of people Cumulative frequency
attempts
0 51
1 34
2 10
3 4
4 1

(i) Calculate the cumulative frequencies and insert them in the table. [1]

(ii) On the grid below, draw and fully annotate, using suitable scales, an appropriate
cumulative frequency graph to illustrate these data.

[5]

© UCLES 2012 4040/13/O/N/12 [Turn over


6

5 Twelve families live in a certain street. The table below summarises the number of girls and For
boys in each of these families. Examiner’s
Use

Number of boys in the family


0 1 2 3
0 1 1 1 0
Number of 1 1 1 2 1
girls in the
family 2 0 0 2 0
3 0 1 1 0

For example, there is one family with two boys and three girls.

(i) Construct the frequency distribution of the number of children per family, and present it
in an appropriate table.

[3]

(ii) Complete the frequency distribution table below to show the number of brothers that the
girls have.

Number of brothers Number of girls (frequency)


0
1
2
3
[3]
© UCLES 2012 4040/13/O/N/12
7

6 (i) Name one measure of central tendency and one measure of dispersion which would be For
distorted by the presence of one extreme observation in a set of data. Examiner’s
Use

Measure of central tendency: ......................................................

Measure of dispersion: .................................................. [2]

(ii) Name one measure of central tendency and one measure of dispersion which could still
be calculated for a set of data even if the largest value in it were unknown.

Measure of central tendency: ......................................................

Measure of dispersion: .................................................. [2]

(iii) The units in which a particular variable is measured are cm. State the units of the
variance of this variable.

................................................... [1]

(iv) Draw a sketch of a distribution in which the mean and median are equal, but in which
the mode is not equal to them.

Frequency

Variable
[1]

© UCLES 2012 4040/13/O/N/12 [Turn over


8

Section B [64 marks] For


Examiner’s
Answer not more than four of the questions 7 to 11. Use

Each question in this section carries 16 marks.

7 (a) A boy has two unbiased coins, one silver and one bronze. In an experiment he tosses the
silver coin, and if a tail lands uppermost tail (T) is recorded. If a head lands uppermost
he tosses the bronze coin, and whichever face lands uppermost is recorded, head (H)
or tail (T).

(i) State the possible recorded outcomes and the probability associated with each.

[4]

(ii) If the experiment is carried out twice, calculate the probability that on both occasions
a tail is recorded.

................................................... [2]
1 1
(b) Of a large bird population near a garden 3 are thrushes, 4 are starlings and the rest
are robins. Assuming that the birds behave independently of each other, calculate the
probability that three birds landing in the garden will

(i) all be thrushes,

................................................... [1]

(ii) include one bird of each of the three species.

................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2012 4040/13/O/N/12
9

On another day, two robins, one starling and one thrush are in the garden. For
Examiner’s
(iii) Under the same assumption, calculate the probability that they will fly away in Use

alphabetical order.

................................................... [2]

(c) Four people, including the car owner and his wife, are going on a journey in a four-
seater car. In how many different ways can they be seated in the car if

(i) the car owner is to drive and his wife is to sit next to him,

................................................... [1]

(ii) the car owner is to drive and the other three people may be seated anywhere,

................................................... [1]

(iii) any of the four people may drive?

................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2012 4040/13/O/N/12 [Turn over


10

8 In answering all parts of this question you are required to show your working, either as For
the calculations leading to your result, or by drawing appropriate lines on the graph. Examiner’s
Use

The cumulative frequency graph below illustrates the marks obtained by 100 candidates on
each of two examination papers.

100
Paper 2
Paper 1

80

60
Cumulative frequency

40

20

Paper 1 Paper 2

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Marks

© UCLES 2012 4040/13/O/N/12


11

Use the graph to estimate For


Examiner’s
(i) the median of the marks scored on Paper 2, Use

................................................... [2]

(ii) the lower quartile, the upper quartile and the interquartile range of the marks scored on
Paper 1.

Lower quartile = ......................................................

Upper quartile = ......................................................

Interquartile range = .................................................. [4]

The maximum mark is the same on both papers.

State, in each case giving a reason,

(iii) on which paper the strongest candidates generally scored more marks,

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iv) on which paper the weakest candidates generally scored more marks,

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(v) which paper gave the greater discrimination between the strongest and the weakest
candidates.

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

For each paper, a distinction is to be awarded to the 7% of candidates who achieve the
highest marks on that paper.

(vi) Estimate the mark on Paper 1 and the mark on Paper 2 which would lead to distinctions
being awarded.

Mark on Paper 1 = ......................................................

Mark on Paper 2 = .................................................. [3]

(vii) Interpret the point at which the two lines on the graph intersect.

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2012 4040/13/O/N/12 [Turn over


12

9 In this question give all death rates per thousand, and those that are not exact to For
2 decimal places. Examiner’s
Use

The following table gives the population of a city in the year 2010, together with various
statistics relating to deaths in the city during that year, and the standard population of the
area in which the city is situated.

Population Number of Death rate Standard City population


Age group
(thousands) deaths (per thousand) population (%) (%)
0– 4 200 2400 12 9
5 – 24 p= 1260 1.5 29
25 – 44 940 q= 3 30
45 – 64 800 11 200 r= 22
65 and over 350 38 850 111 10

(i) Calculate the values of p, q and r and insert them in the table.

[3]

(ii) Calculate the crude death rate of the city.

................................................... [4]

(iii) Calculate the standardised death rate of the city.

................................................... [4]

© UCLES 2012 4040/13/O/N/12


13

(iv) Calculate the percentage of the city’s population in each age group, and insert your For
results in the table. Examiner’s
Use

[2]

(v) Using your results in part (iv), explain why the city’s crude death rate is higher than its
standardised death rate.

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(vi) If the last two classes in the table were combined into a 45 and over class, state, with a
reason, which of the rates in parts (ii) and (iii) would remain unaltered.

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2012 4040/13/O/N/12 [Turn over


14

10 (a) In this part of the question you are NOT required to draw a histogram. For
Examiner’s
The table below shows the age distribution of the residents of a housing estate. Use

Age (years) Number of residents


under 5 8
5 – under 11 9
11 – under 16 15
16 – under 21 23
21 – under 30 36
30 – under 40 35
40 – under 50 25
50 – under 65 22
65 and over 27

The residents in the 30 – under 40 group are to be represented in a histogram by a


rectangle of height 35 units.

Calculate the heights of the rectangles in the same histogram representing

(i) the 40 – under 50 group,

......................................... units [1]

(ii) the 11 – under 16 group,

......................................... units [2]

(iii) the 50 – under 65 group.

......................................... units [2]

There are four times as many residents in the 21 – under 30 group as there are in the
5 – under 11 group.

(iv) Give a reason why the rectangle representing the 21 – under 30 group would not
be four times as high as that representing the 5 – under 11 group.

..................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2012 4040/13/O/N/12


15

(b) A manufacturer of car tyres presented the following data summarising the life (in terms For
of distance travelled) of a sample of 100 tyres. Examiner’s
Use

Distance 18 19 20 21 22
Frequency 8 14 26 35 17

A statistician presented with this data assumed that the distances had been measured
in thousands of kilometres, correct to the nearest thousand.

(i) Estimate, to 3 significant figures, the mean and the standard deviation of the
distances, under the statistician’s assumption.

Mean = ..................... thousands of km

Standard deviation = ..................... thousands of km [5]

The statistician subsequently discovered that the distances in the table actually
represented lower class limits (for example, the 18 represents any distance in the
18 – under 19 range), and also that they were in units of thousands of miles.

(ii) Taking 1 mile to be equal to 1.6 km, estimate the correct mean and standard
deviation in metric units.

Mean = ..................... thousands of km

Standard deviation = ..................... thousands of km [5]

© UCLES 2012 4040/13/O/N/12 [Turn over


16

11 (a) At the end of the year 2009, 100 students were asked which of the three countries France For
(F ), Germany (G) and Italy (I ) they had ever visited. The diagram below summarises Examiner’s
their replies. Ten of the students had not visited any of the three countries. Use

F G

32 7 24

2
5 x

17

10

(i) Find the value of x.

x = .................................................. [2]

(ii) State what the value of x represents.

..................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2012 4040/13/O/N/12


17

During the year 2010 the following visits took place. For
Examiner’s
Of the students who had previously visited only France, 2 visited Germany, and a Use

different 1 visited Italy.

Of the students who had previously visited only France and Germany, 3 visited Italy.

Of the 10 students who had previously not visited any of the three countries, 1 visited
France, a different 1 visited Italy, and a further 2 visited Germany.

(iii) Complete the following diagram to illustrate the situation at the end of the year
2010.

F G

[6]

© UCLES 2012 4040/13/O/N/12 [Turn over


18

(b) In this part of the question you are NOT required to draw any pie charts. For
Examiner’s
The treasurer of a tennis club classifies all club expenditure under four headings: Use

maintenance of the club house and courts; tennis balls; wages paid to the club cleaner;
taxes & insurance. In the year 2010 expenditure on these four items was in the ratio
4 : 3 : 2 : 1 respectively.

These amounts are to be represented by a pie chart of radius 7 cm.

(i) Calculate the angle of the sector representing expenditure on tennis balls.

Angle = .................................................. [3]

In the previous year, 2009, total expenditure had been 90% of what it was in 2010.

(ii) Calculate, to 1 decimal place, the radius of the pie chart which would be drawn to
represent expenditure in 2009.

............................................ cm [2]

In 2011, because of a large increase in membership, the expenditure on tennis balls


was double that in 2010, but all other expenditure remained constant.

(iii) Calculate, to the nearest degree, the angle of the sector which would represent the
expenditure on tennis balls in a pie chart for the year 2011.

Angle = .................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2012 4040/13/O/N/12


19

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2012 4040/13/O/N/12


20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2012 4040/13/O/N/12


UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
General Certificate of Education Ordinary Level
* 3 2 2 5 5 5 5 5 2 1 *

STATISTICS 4040/12
Paper 1 October/November 2012
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper.
Additional Materials: Pair of compasses
Protractor

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions in Section A and not more than four questions from Section B.
If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
The use of an electronic calculator is expected in this paper.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.

DC (SJF/CGW) 51081/5
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
2

Section A [36 marks] For


Examiner’s
Answer all of the questions 1 to 6. Use

1 A supermarket carried out a survey to see if customers were satisfied with the services it
provided. The results are shown in the pictogram below.

= 60 satisfied customers

= 6 dissatisfied customers

(i) State how many customers were

(a) satisfied,

................................................... [1]

(b) dissatisfied.

................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain why this is not a good pictogram.

..........................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

The survey was carried out by a team of interviewers who spoke to customers in the
supermarket on one particular weekday afternoon.

(iii) State, giving a reason for your answer, whether or not you would expect the results of
the survey to be biased.

..........................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2012 4040/12/O/N/12


3

2 A car hire company has 5 small cars, 15 medium-sized cars and 10 large cars. An inspector For
selects a sample of cars from this population to test their mechanical condition. Examiner’s
Use

(i) For the different possible sampling methods, state whether each of the following is true
or false.

(a) A (simple) random sample of size 10 might contain only medium-sized cars.

................................................... [1]

(b) A systematic sample will require the use of a sampling frame.

................................................... [1]

(c) If quota sampling is used, the inspector may select as many cars as he wishes, and
as many of each type of car as he wishes.

................................................... [1]

(d) If systematic sampling is used, every car has an equal chance of being selected
after the first car has been selected.

................................................... [1]

(ii) The inspector decides he has time to test only 9 cars. If he wishes to obtain a random
sample stratified by car size, find how many cars of each size he must select.

Small .......................................................

Medium .......................................................

Large ................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2012 4040/12/O/N/12 [Turn over


4

3 The diagram below shows the number of musicians performing at a music festival who play For
one or more of the instruments bass, keyboards and drums. Examiner’s
Use

EDVV NH\ERDUGV

  

 



GUXPV

Use this information to find the number of musicians who play

(i) keyboards,

................................................... [1]

(ii) bass and drums,

................................................... [1]

(iii) keyboards or drums or both.

................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2012 4040/12/O/N/12


5

The guitar is also played by all the bass players, but not by any of the other musicians. For
Examiner’s
For the four instruments, bass, keyboards, drums and guitar, find the number of musicians Use

who play

(iv) exactly three instruments,

................................................... [1]

(v) exactly two instruments.

................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2012 4040/12/O/N/12 [Turn over


6

4 The products leaving a factory are checked every day to ensure that faulty items are not sent For
out to customers. The table below shows values of the variable X, the number of faulty items Examiner’s
found in a day, for a period of 50 days. Use

Number of faulty items, x 0 1 2 3 4 5 or more

Number of days, f 19 10 7 6 5 3

For example, there were 7 days when 2 faulty items were found.

(i) State the mode of the distribution, and explain why it is a poor measure of central
tendency in this case.

..........................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Find the median of the distribution.

................................................... [1]

The mean of the distribution has been calculated to be 1.75 faulty items per day.

(iii) Find the upper class limit of the 5 or more class which has been used in the calculation.

................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2012 4040/12/O/N/12


7

5 Each person at a committee meeting receives a plate of seven biscuits for refreshments, of For
which four are ginger, two are chocolate, and one is plain. One committee member chooses Examiner’s
four biscuits at random from her plate. Use

If X is the number of chocolate biscuits chosen,

(i) state the possible values of X,

................................................... [1]

(ii) find the probability of each value of X, and present your results in a suitable table.

[5]

© UCLES 2012 4040/12/O/N/12 [Turn over


8

6 At a medical centre the dosage for a particular vaccination is 0.500 ml, but small variations For
from this are acceptable. Examiner’s
Use

The exact dosages (in millilitres) in a prepared batch of six were found to be as follows.

0.512 0.506 0.493 0.518 0.491 0.514

(i) Calculate, to 5 decimal places, the standard deviation of this batch.

................................................... [2]

It is very important that, for a batch of six, the standard deviation is no greater than 0.01250 ml,
and the range is no more than three times the standard deviation.

(ii) Find whether or not the prepared batch satisfies both of these conditions.

...................................................................................................................................... [3]

A trainee technician at the medical centre suggests that, as well as checking that the
standard deviation is not too large, they must also check that it is not too small.

(iii) State, giving a reason, whether or not you agree with the trainee.

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2012 4040/12/O/N/12


9

Section B [64 marks] For


Examiner’s
Answer not more than four of the questions 7 to 11. Use

Each question in this section carries 16 marks.

7 Two universities carried out a survey of their graduates one year after graduation. The
graduates were classified as employed, unemployed, or engaged in further study, as shown
in the following pie charts, which are drawn to scale.

University A University B

Employed
Unemployed
Further study

The chart for University A represents a total of 1170 graduates.

Find the number of graduates who, one year after graduation, were

(i) from University A and engaged in further study,

................................................... [2]

(ii) from University B and unemployed.

................................................... [4]

© UCLES 2012 4040/12/O/N/12 [Turn over


10

The graduates from University A who were employed were asked how long it took them to For
find employment. The times are represented in the histogram below. Examiner’s
Use
250

200

Number of 150
graduates
per
1 month
100

50

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Time (months)

(iii) State the modal class.

................................................... [1]

Use the histogram to find the number of graduates from University A for whom the time taken
to find employment was

(iv) from 0 months to 3 months,

................................................... [2]
(v) from 3 months to 6 months,

................................................... [2]
(vi) from 6 months to 12 months.

................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2012 4040/12/O/N/12


11

Of the employed graduates from University A, 163 were science graduates. For
Examiner’s
(vii) Estimate the number of science graduates from University A who found employment within Use

6 months of graduation.

................................................... [3]

(viii) State the assumption which you have made in your calculation in part (vii).

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2012 4040/12/O/N/12 [Turn over


12

8 In this question calculate all fertility rates per thousand, and to the nearest whole For
number. Examiner’s
Use

The fertility rate is defined as the number of births per 1000 females.

The table below gives information about the female population and births in the town of
Bluedorf for the year 2010, together with the standard female population of the area in which
Bluedorf is situated.

Age group of Population of females Age group Standard population


Births
females in age group fertility rate of females (%)
Under 20 112 3200 25

20 – 30 459 2250 15

31 – 40 488 3050 20

Over 40 76 4000 40

(i) Calculate the crude fertility rate for Bluedorf.

................................................... [4]

(ii) Calculate the fertility rate for each age group and insert the values in the table above.

[2]

(iii) Calculate the standardised fertility rate for Bluedorf.

................................................... [4]

© UCLES 2012 4040/12/O/N/12


13

The table below gives information about Redville, another town in the same area as Bluedorf, For
also for the year 2010. Examiner’s
Use

Age group of Fertility rate Population of females


females (per 1000 females) in age group
Under 20 32 3000

20 – 30 225 1560

31 – 40 180 1700

Over 40 20 4950

(iv) Calculate the standardised fertility rate for Redville in the year 2010, using the same
standard population as for Bluedorf.

................................................... [2]

(v) Find how many more births there were in Bluedorf than in Redville in the year 2010.

................................................... [2]

The local government of the area in which Bluedorf and Redville are situated wishes to limit
population growth, but only has sufficient funds for a publicity campaign on birth control in
one of these two towns.

(vi) State, with a reason, in which of these two towns the campaign should be conducted.

..........................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2012 4040/12/O/N/12 [Turn over


14

9 In answering all parts of this question you are required to show your working, either as For
the calculations leading to your result, or by drawing appropriate lines on the graph. Examiner’s
Use

Passengers on an aeroplane are allowed to check-in one bag for carriage in the aeroplane’s
hold. The weights of checked-in bags for one particular flight are illustrated in the cumulative
frequency curve below.

160

140

120

100

Cumulative
frequency 80
(bags)

60

40

20

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
Weight of bag (kg)

(i) Use the graph to estimate

(a) the median of the weights,

............................................. kg [1]

© UCLES 2012 4040/12/O/N/12


15

(b) the interquartile range of the weights, For


Examiner’s
Use

............................................. kg [4]

(c) the value of k, if the k th percentile of the weights is 24 kg.

k = ................................................... [2]

The weight allowance for a checked-in bag is 20 kg. Bags heavier than 20 kg are classified as
overweight.

(ii) Use the graph to estimate

(a) the number of overweight bags,

................................................... [2]

(b) the median weight of the overweight bags.

............................................. kg [2]

For overweight bags passengers are charged $8 per kilogram for the amount by which the
weight of their bag exceeds 20 kg. For example, for a bag weighing 21.5 kg, the passenger
would be charged $12.

(iii) Assuming that the median and mean of the overweight bags are approximately the
same, use your answers to part (ii) to estimate the total money received in charges for
the overweight bags on this particular flight.

$ ................................................... [4]

(iv) Interpret the point at which the cumulative frequency curve meets the horizontal axis.

..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2012 4040/12/O/N/12 [Turn over


16

10 Soraya is checking her telephone bill. For all the national calls listed she writes down the For
length of the call, to the nearest minute, and the cost of the call, to the nearest cent. The Examiner’s
results are shown in the following table. Use

Length of call (minutes), x 1 8 14 3 7 1 2 11

Cost of call (cents), y 25 71 108 39 63 28 34 93

(i) Plot these data on the grid below.


y

120

100

80
Cost
(cents)

60

40

20

0 x
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Length of call (minutes)
[2]

The data have an overall mean of (5.875, 57.625) and a lower semi-average of (1.75, 31.5).

(ii) Show how the value 31.5 is calculated.

[2]

© UCLES 2012 4040/12/O/N/12


17

(iii) Find the upper semi-average, and plot this and the two given averages on your graph. For
Examiner’s
Use

................................................... [3]

(iv) Use your plotted averages to draw a line of best fit, and find its equation in the form
y = mx + c.

.................................................. [4]

For national calls, the cost is made up of a connection charge for the call, and a charge per
minute for the length of the call.

(v) Write down the amounts of these charges.

Connection charge = ............................................ cents

Charge per minute = ............................................ cents


[1]

For local calls, there is a fixed charge of 10 cents for any call lasting up to 2 minutes. There is
a further charge of 3 cents per minute for any length of time for which the call is longer than
2 minutes.

(vi) Draw, on the grid in part (i), a graph showing the cost of local calls lasting between
0 and 14 minutes.

[2]

Later, Soraya makes a national call which costs 40 cents, and a local call which costs
40 cents.

(vii) Use your graphs to estimate how much longer the local call lasted than the national call.
Give your answer to the nearest minute.

.....................................minutes [2]

© UCLES 2012 4040/12/O/N/12 [Turn over


18

11 In this question give your answers either as fractions, or as exact decimals, or as For
decimals correct to 3 significant figures. Examiner’s
Use

(a) In an office there are 15 workers, of whom 3 are supervisors and 12 are assistants. Two
workers are chosen at random, without replacement.

Find the probability of choosing

(i) two assistants,

................................................... [2]

(ii) one supervisor and one assistant.

................................................... [2]

(b) Kwame likes quizzes, and estimates that he knows the correct answer to 60% of quiz
questions. He enters a television quiz, in which, for each question asked, four alternative
answers are offered to the contestant, only one of which is correct. If Kwame knows the
correct answer he chooses the correct answer, otherwise he makes a random guess.
Assume that his own estimate of his knowledge is accurate.

(i) Find the probability that he gets a question he is asked correct.

................................................... [2]

(ii) If he is asked three questions, find the probability that

(a) he answers them all correctly,

................................................... [2]

(b) he knows none of the correct answers, but answers all the questions correctly.

................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2012 4040/12/O/N/12


19

(c) In a game, a turn consists of rolling an unbiased six-sided dice with faces numbered 1, For
2, 3, 4, 5 and 6. Examiner’s
If the number obtained is 3, 4, 5 or 6, then that is the score for the turn. Use

If the number obtained is 2, then the dice is rolled one more time, and the score for the
turn is the sum of 2 and the number obtained on the second roll.
If the number obtained is 1, the dice is rolled two more times, and the score for the turn
is the sum of 1 and the numbers obtained on the second and third rolls.

If, in a turn, a player obtains a score of 5, find the probability that the dice has been
rolled two times altogether.

................................................... [5]

© UCLES 2012 4040/12/O/N/12


20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2012 4040/12/O/N/12


UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
General Certificate of Education Ordinary Level
* 7 0 3 4 5 5 9 8 8 5 *

STATISTICS 4040/13
Paper 1 October/November 2011
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper.
Additional Materials: Mathematical tables
Pair of compasses
Protractor

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions in Section A and not more than four questions from Section B.
If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
The use of an electronic calculator is expected in this paper.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.

DC (RCL (PL/CGW)) 34787/5


© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
2

Section A [36 marks]

Answer all of the questions 1 to 6.

1 The number of patients in the waiting room of a medical surgery was recorded at noon on each of
eleven different days. The recorded numbers were

3 5 7 8 9 1■ 7 5 5 6 4

The largest number, shown as 1■, was partially illegible, although it was clearly a two-digit number
with first digit 1.

(i) Name and calculate two measures of average (central tendency) which can still be found.

[4]

(ii) Name and calculate one measure of dispersion which can still be found.

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/13/O/N/11


3

2 (a) Describe briefly the difference between the method of obtaining a simple random sample
and that of obtaining a stratified random sample.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

(b) Describe briefly how you could obtain a systematic sample of the pupils in a school.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

(c) The results of a statistical survey may be subject to either or both of bias and error. Explain
the difference between bias and error in this context.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/13/O/N/11 [Turn over


4

3 The pictogram below illustrates the number of houses in each of three streets in a town.

High Street

Middle Street

Low Street

The symbol represents 10 houses.

(i) State the number of houses in Middle Street.

....................................................[1]

(ii) State how many more houses there are in Low Street than in High Street.

....................................................[1]

ln these three streets there are altogether 74 houses.

(iii) Find the number of houses represented by the symbol

....................................................[2]

Two of the houses in these three streets are chosen at random.

(iv) Calculate, as a fraction in its lowest terms, the probability that both chosen houses are in
Middle Street.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/13/O/N/11


5

4 A survey was conducted in 47 households to discover how many cats and how many dogs each
owned. No household owned more than 3 of either animal. The results are to be shown in the
following table.

Number of dogs
0 1 2 3 TOTAL
0 13 29
1 12
Number
of 2 4
cats
3 2
TOTAL 24 13 7 3 47

The given frequency shows that 13 households owned neither a cat nor a dog.

(i) Insert the appropriate frequencies into the table for each of the following pieces of
information.

(a) 1 household owned two cats and one dog, and 2 households owned one cat and two
dogs. [1]

(b) All other households which owned more than one of either animal owned none of the
other. [1]

(ii) Complete the table.

[4]

© UCLES 2011 4040/13/O/N/11 [Turn over


6

5 During the course of one week a man recorded how much time he spent carrying out various
1 1
tasks in his garden. He spent –3 of the total time weeding and –4 of the total time planting flowers
and vegetables. The remaining time was split equally between mowing grass and all other work.

(i) Draw and label a pie chart of radius 5 cm to illustrate the proportion of the time spent by the
man on each of these four tasks.

[4]

(ii) During the following week the man spent 50% more time working in his garden than in the
first week. Calculate, to 2 decimal places, the radius of a comparative pie chart that would
represent the second week. (You are not required to draw a second pie chart.)

..............................................cm [2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/13/O/N/11


7

6 The histogram below represents the age distribution of the workers in a factory.

40

30

Number of
workers
20
per 5-year
interval

10

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Age (years)

Find

(i) the number of workers who were aged between 35 and 50,

....................................................[2]

(ii) the number of workers who were aged at most 35 years.

....................................................[2]

There were altogether 191 workers in the factory. All those not yet represented were aged between
50 and 70 years.

(iii) Draw a rectangle on the histogram to represent the 50 – 70 group.

[2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/13/O/N/11 [Turn over


8

Section B [64 marks]

Answer not more than four of the questions 7 to 11.

Each question in this section carries 16 marks.

7 (a) Oliver and Pierre are playing a game which requires that initially a fair coin is tossed to decide
which of the two has the first turn. A turn involves rolling an unbiased six-sided dice with faces
numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6. They keep rolling the dice alternately until one of them rolls a 4,
at which point he is declared the winner.

(i) Calculate the probability, before the coin is tossed, that Pierre will win on his first turn.

....................................................[3]

(ii) Given that the coin has been tossed, and Oliver is to roll the dice first, calculate the
probability that he will win on his second turn.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/13/O/N/11


9

(b) A box contains 5 red discs and 7 blue discs. A girl draws a disc, notes its colour, and replaces
it in the box. A boy then draws a disc and notes its colour.

Calculate the probability that

(i) both discs drawn are red,

....................................................[1]

(ii) the discs drawn are one of each colour.

....................................................[2]

The experiment is then repeated, using the same original contents of the box, except that the
girl’s disc is not replaced before the boy draws.

Calculate the probability that

(iii) both discs drawn are red,

....................................................[2]

(iv) the discs drawn are one of each colour.

....................................................[1]

© UCLES 2011 4040/13/O/N/11 [Turn over


10

(c) In a group of 100 people, each is classified by gender and according to whether or not he or
she wears glasses. The results are tabulated below.

Wears glasses Does not wear glasses


Male 12 45
Female 10 33

One person is chosen at random from the group. Denote the event ‘the chosen person is
female’ by A, and the event ‘the chosen person does not wear glasses’ by B.

(i) Define the events B ʹ and (Aʹ ∪ B ).

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[2]

(ii) Calculate the probability of each of the events in part (i).

P(B ʹ) = ........................................................

P(Aʹ ∪ B ) = ....................................................[2]

(iii) Given that the chosen person is male, calculate the probability that he does not wear
glasses.

....................................................[1]

© UCLES 2011 4040/13/O/N/11


11

BLANK PAGE

[Turn over for Question 8]

© UCLES 2011 4040/13/O/N/11 [Turn over


12

8 A school wishes to establish a system of awarding points in each event in the school athletics
championships. As a trial experiment, it has been decided to analyse data from past years for
one particular throwing event. The distances thrown, in metres, have been summarised into two
grouped frequency distributions, one for male athletes and one for female athletes. The cumulative
frequency graphs illustrating these two distributions are shown below.

100
Male

90
Female

80

70

60

Cumulative
50
frequency

40

30

20

10

Female Male
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
Distance (metres)

The further the throw, the more points are to be awarded. Each gender is to have its own points
scale.

(i) For male athletes the shortest 10% of throws are to be awarded the minimum of 1 point.
Estimate the shortest distance which a male athlete must throw to be awarded 2 points.

........................................metres [2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/13/O/N/11


13

(ii) For male athletes, the central 40% of throws are to be awarded 3 points. Estimate the
distances between which a male athlete must throw to be awarded 3 points.

................... metres and .................. metres [4]

(iii) Estimate the median, upper quartile and lower quartile distances thrown by female athletes.

Median = ....................................... metres [5]

Upper quartile = ....................................... metres [5]

Lower quartile = ....................................... metres [5]

A quantity called the inter-quartile ratio is obtained by expressing the inter-quartile range as a
percentage of the median.

(iv) Using your results from part (iii), estimate, to 1 decimal place, the inter-quartile ratio for female
athletes.

................................................% [3]

(v) Are the positions of the two curves, relative to each other, what you would expect them to be?
Give a reason.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/13/O/N/11 [Turn over


14

9 (a) For summarising its census data, a country divides its population into three age groups, 0
to 10 years, 11 to 30 years, and 31 years and older. The marriage rates for the three groups
at the last census were mistakenly published in the wrong order as 12 per thousand, 5 per
thousand and 0 per thousand.

State, with a reason in each case, which marriage rate relates to

(i) the ‘0 to 10’ group,

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(ii) the ‘11 to 30’ group,

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(iii) the ‘31 and over’ group.

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(b) The table below gives information about two neighbouring towns, A and B, together with the
standard population for the area in which the towns are situated.

Town A
Standard Town B
Age group Number of Death rate
population Population population
deaths (per thousand)
00 – 24 3500 3000 45 P 2500
25 – 49 3000 2500 Q 8 1500
50 and over 2500 R 30 20 3000

For Town A, calculate

(i) the values of P, Q and R,

P = ......................................................

Q = ......................................................

R = ..................................................[3]

© UCLES 2011 4040/13/O/N/11


15

(ii) the crude death rate per thousand, to 2 decimal places,

....................................................[2]

(iii) the standardised death rate per thousand, to 2 decimal places.

....................................................[4]

For Town B the crude death rate is 14.0 per thousand, and the standardised death rate is 12.5
per thousand. One of these rates is larger than the corresponding rate for Town A, but the
other is smaller.

(iv) State, with a reason, which rate should be used to compare the chances of survival in
the two towns, and which town gives the better chance.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[3]

(v) State what causes the other rate to lead to an incorrect conclusion in this case.

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2011 4040/13/O/N/11 [Turn over


16

10 The following table gives data for eight geographical areas derived from the 1991 UK Census.

Area A B C D E F G H
X 12.8 7.3 7.6 15.2 3.1 6.6 5.0 7.9
Y 77 52 57 73 33 49 32 51

X is the percentage of the population holding university qualifications.


Y is the percentage of houses owned by the occupiers.

(i) Plot points representing these eight areas on the grid below. [3]

y
80

60

40

20

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 x

(ii) Calculate the overall mean point and plot it on the grid.

[2]

(iii) Explain why, in calculating the semi-averages, you should use areas B, E, F and G for one
average, and areas A, C, D and H for the other.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2011 4040/13/O/N/11


17

(iv) Obtain the two semi-averages and plot them on the grid.

[3]

(v) Draw the line of best fit using your plotted averages. [1]

(vi) Use your graph to obtain the equation of the line of best fit, giving it in the form
y = mx + c.

y = ....................................................[3]

(vii) (a) Comment on how well the line you have drawn fits the points you have plotted.

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(b) Explain why the variable labelled X has been considered to be the independent variable.

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(c) If the variable labelled Y had been the independent variable, state which four areas would
have been used to obtain the lower semi-average. (You are not required to calculate this
semi-average.)

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2011 4040/13/O/N/11 [Turn over


18

11 A company doctor wished to assess whether there was an association between the amount
of sleep employees achieved during nights prior to working days and their productivity. Fifty
employees were asked to record, to the nearest hour, the total number of hours they slept during
such nights in one particular week. The results are tabulated below.

31 36 37 48 38 34 37 36 44 36
38 37 38 29 42 36 40 26 37 34
39 38 37 41 33 38 38 36 37 39
36 37 35 37 36 37 37 43 36 43
36 37 36 32 38 35 37 38 41 40

The total number of hours slept by the fifty employees was 1857.

(i) Calculate, to 2 decimal places, the mean number of hours slept per employee.

....................................................[1]

The table below, from which some values have been omitted, summarises the data in the form of
a grouped frequency distribution.

Number of
Hours of sleep Class
employees
(to nearest hour) mid-points (x )
(frequency)
25 – 29 2
30 – 31
– 35 34 5
36 36
37 12
38
39 – 40 6
– 44 43
45 – 49 1

(ii) Insert in the table all the missing values of class limits, class mid-points and
frequencies. [5]

© UCLES 2011 4040/13/O/N/11


19

(iii) Estimate, to 2 decimal places, the mean of the data in your table.

....................................................[2]

(iv) Explain why the values for the mean number of hours slept which you have obtained in parts
(i) and (iii) are different.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

(v) Express the difference between the two means as a percentage of the true value, correct to 3
significant figures.

....................................................[2]

(vi) Using the data in your table, estimate, to 2 decimal places, the standard deviation of the
number of hours slept by these employees.

....................................................[4]

© UCLES 2011 4040/13/O/N/11


20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2011 4040/13/O/N/11


UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
General Certificate of Education Ordinary Level
* 0 9 0 4 6 8 2 1 8 3 *

STATISTICS 4040/12
Paper 1 October/November 2011
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper.
Additional Materials: Mathematical tables
Pair of compasses
Protractor

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions in Section A and not more than four questions from Section B.
If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
The use of an electronic calculator is expected in this paper.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

DC (SLM) 44823
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
2

Section A [36 marks]

Answer all of the questions 1 to 6.

1 In a biological experiment, a scientist measured the heights of a large number of plants. She
calculated the following statistical measures for the heights.

Median 12.3 cm
Lower quartile 7.9 cm
Upper quartile 16.5 cm
90th percentile 18.1 cm

(i) Write down the percentage of plants whose height is

(a) less than 12.3 cm,

....................................................[1]

(b) more than 7.9 cm,

....................................................[1]

(c) between 16.5 cm and 18.1 cm,

....................................................[1]

(d) less than 7.9 cm or more than 18.1 cm.

....................................................[1]

(ii) Using the above information, state whether you would expect the mean of this distribution
to be about the same as the median, smaller than the median, or larger than the median.
Explain briefly the reason for your answer.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/12/O/N/11


3

2 In a school class there are 10 boys and 20 girls. The teacher selects a sample of 6 pupils from the
class.

(i) In each case, write down the one word which best describes the method of sampling used
if she

(a) selects every 5th pupil from the class register,

....................................................[1]

(b) selects 2 of the boys and 4 of the girls at random from the class register,

....................................................[1]

(c) selects the first 3 boys and the first 3 girls who arrive for a lesson.

....................................................[1]

Having selected the sample, the teacher collects data from each pupil by asking three questions.

A How many brothers and sisters do you have?

B Is there a computer in your home?

C How much time did you spend doing your homework yesterday?

(ii) In each case, state whether the data obtained from these questions is either qualitative or
quantitative, and is either discrete or continuous.

For A, .................................................. and ..................................................

For B, .................................................. and ..................................................

For C, .................................................. and .................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2011 4040/12/O/N/11 [Turn over


4

3 The diagram below shows the number of people at an international conference who speak one or
more of the languages Arabic, French and Urdu.

Arabic French

13 9 16

3
5 2

10

Urdu

Use this information to find the number of people who speak

(i) Arabic,

....................................................[1]

(ii) Urdu and French but not Arabic,

....................................................[1]

(iii) French and Urdu,

....................................................[1]

(iv) exactly two of these languages,

....................................................[1]

(v) Arabic or Urdu (or both).

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/12/O/N/11


5

4 For a particular type of canned food, the nominal mass of food in the can (the mass written on
the can) is 450 g. A sample of 8 cans was chosen, and the actual mass of food in each can was
measured accurately. The following results (in grams) were obtained.

452.3 451.6 448.5 450.0 451.9 449.3 453.2 447.1

(i) Using an assumed mean equal to the nominal mass, find the mean and standard deviation
of these values.

Mean = ........................................................

Standard deviation = ....................................................[4]

(ii) The empty cans each have a mass of 180.0 g. Write down the mean and standard deviation
of the total mass of these cans of food.

Mean = ........................................................

Standard deviation = ....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/12/O/N/11 [Turn over


6

5 In a game, a turn involves throwing an unbiased six-sided dice with faces numbered 1 to 6, and, if
a 6 is thrown, a disc is chosen from a bag containing 1 black disc and 3 white discs.

Selections from the bag are made with replacement, and the person who chooses the black disc
wins the game.

Carlo and Dean throw alternately, with Carlo throwing first.

Find the probability that

(i) Carlo does not choose a disc from the bag on his first turn,

....................................................[1]

(ii) Carlo does not win on his first turn,

....................................................[2]

(iii) Dean wins on his second turn.

....................................................[3]

© UCLES 2011 4040/12/O/N/11


7

6 A team composed of equal numbers of men and women enters an athletics competition. In each
event it is possible to win a gold, silver or bronze medal. The team wins 25 medals, of which 3 are
gold, as shown in the following table.

Medals won by Medals won by


TOTAL
men women
Gold 3
Silver
Bronze
TOTAL 25

(i) The team wins equal numbers of silver and bronze medals. Use this information to insert two
numbers into the table.

[1]

(ii) The women win one more medal than the men. Use this information to insert two more
numbers into the table.

[1]

(iii) The women win only one gold medal, but they win twice as many silver medals as bronze
medals. Use this information to complete the table.

[2]

(iv) The head coach has a method of assessing performance overall by counting 4 points for a
gold medal, 2 points for a silver medal, and 1 point for a bronze medal. Using this method,
and showing all your working, find who have performed better, the men or the women.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/12/O/N/11 [Turn over


8

Section B [64 marks]

Answer not more than four of the questions 7 to 11.

Each question in this section carries 16 marks.

7 In this question give your answers either as fractions, or as decimals correct to 3 significant
figures.

In a hotel there are 25 rooms. The following table shows the number of guests staying in these
rooms on one particular night.

Number of guests 0 1 2 3 4
Number of rooms 3 4 12 5 1

For example, 5 rooms each have 3 guests staying in them.

(i) Find the total number of guests staying in the hotel on this night.

....................................................[3]

(ii) The hotel manager chooses a room at random to check the standard of cleaning. Find the
probability that

(a) it is an unoccupied room,

....................................................[1]

(b) it has at most 3 guests staying in it.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/12/O/N/11


9

(iii) The manager chooses a guest at random to ask if they like their room. Find the probability
that this guest is staying in a room

(a) with 2 other guests,

....................................................[3]

(b) with at least 2 other guests.

....................................................[3]

(iv) The manager chooses two guests at random. Find the probability that they are staying in the
same room.

....................................................[4]

© UCLES 2011 4040/12/O/N/11 [Turn over


10

8 A travel company collected data on the ages, x years, of the people who booked holidays with the
company. The results were formed into the following grouped frequency distribution.

Age, x (years) Number of people


20 – under 25 7
25 – under 35 16
35 – under 40 12
40 – under 45 14
45 – under 60 21
60 – under 80 10

(i) Estimate, to 3 significant figures, the mean and the standard deviation of the ages of the
people who booked holidays with the company.

Mean = ........................................................

Standard deviation = ....................................................[8]

© UCLES 2011 4040/12/O/N/11


11

(ii) On the following grid draw a histogram to illustrate the data in the table above. The rectangle
representing the 35 – under 40 class has already been drawn for you.

20

16

Number 12
of people
per 5
years 8

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Age (years)

[5]

(iii) On the same grid, draw a frequency polygon to represent the data. [1]

(iv) One year later the company repeated the research and found that the mean and standard
deviation of the ages were now 40.7 years and 16.1 years respectively. Explain briefly what
these values tell you about how the ages of people booking holidays had changed.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/12/O/N/11 [Turn over


12

9 A large company recorded the time spent travelling in one particular week by the 40 people in its
sales team. These times are illustrated in the cumulative frequency curve below.

40

30

Cumulative
frequency 20
(salespeople)

10

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Travelling time (hours)

(i) Use the graph to estimate

(a) the median of the travelling times,

........................................ hours [1]

(b) the interquartile range of the travelling times,

........................................ hours [4]

(c) the 80th percentile of the travelling times.

........................................ hours [2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/12/O/N/11


13

(ii) Use the graph to estimate the number of salespeople who spent more than 12.5 hours
travelling.

....................................................[3]

Because of the expense, the company wanted to reduce the time spent by its salespeople in
travelling. The sales team were given a training course on using the internet to improve sales
techniques. The table below shows the distribution of the team’s travelling times in a subsequent
week after the training.

Travelling time Number of


Cumulative frequency
(hours) salespeople
under 5 7
5 – under 10 13
10 – under 15 13
15 – under 20 5
20 – under 25 2
25 – under 30 0

(iii) Enter the cumulative frequencies for this distribution in the table. [1]

(iv) Draw the cumulative frequency curve for this distribution on the same grid as the given
cumulative frequency curve. [2]

(v) Use your graph to estimate the percentage reduction in the number of salespeople who spent
more than 12.5 hours travelling after the training. Give your answer to 2 significant figures.

....................................................[3]

© UCLES 2011 4040/12/O/N/11 [Turn over


14

10 Abdul is considering buying a particular model of new car. To see how well the car will keep its
value, he collects information on the price of old cars of this model. The information is given in the
following table.

Age of car (years), x 1.5 3.0 3.5 4.5 6.25 7.0 8.75 10.0
Price (thousands of $), y 13.2 11.8 10.5 9.4 7.0 6.8 4.4 2.6

(i) Draw a scatter diagram of these data on the grid below.

16

14

12

10
Price
(thousands 8
of $)
6

0 x
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Age of car (years)
[3]

(ii) Calculate the overall mean and the two semi-averages of the data, and plot them on your
graph.

[5]

© UCLES 2011 4040/12/O/N/11


15

(iii) Use your plotted averages to draw a line of best fit, and find its equation in the form y = mx + c.

....................................................[4]

(iv) Use your equation to estimate the price of a car of this model which is 5 years old.

$ ....................................................[2]

(v) Interpret the point at which the line of best fit meets the y-axis.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

Abdul’s friend Bruno also wants to buy a new car, but of a different model. Bruno does a similar
investigation on his chosen model of car, and obtains a line of best fit with equation y = 0.93x + 16.2.

(vi) Explain briefly why Bruno has probably made a mistake in his calculation.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2011 4040/12/O/N/11 [Turn over


16

11 In this question calculate all death rates per thousand. Where values do not work out exactly
give your answers to two decimal places.

The table below gives information on the population and deaths in the town of Bosco for the year
2010, together with the standard population of the area in which Bosco is situated.

Age group Standard


Age group Deaths Population
death rate population (%)
0 – 20 9 3600 18
21 – 50 33 7500 40
51 – 70 45 4000 30
Over 70 63 1750 12

(i) Calculate the crude death rate for Bosco.

............................................................[4]

(ii) Calculate the death rate for each age group, and insert the values in the table above.

[2]

(iii) Use your results from part (ii) to calculate the standardised death rate for Bosco.

............................................................[4]

© UCLES 2011 4040/12/O/N/11


17

Riva and Techno are two other towns in the same area. The table below gives data for these towns,
also for 2010.

Crude Death Rate Standardised Death


Town Population
(per thousand) Rate (per thousand)
Riva 18 200 8.79 8.21
Techno 15 000 9.60 9.65

(iv) Showing all your working, find which of the three towns experienced the largest number of
total deaths in 2010.

....................................................[3]

(v) State, giving a reason, which of the three towns appears to have the healthiest environment.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

(vi) Considering your answers to parts (iv) and (v) together, explain briefly what has caused this
situation to occur.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2011 4040/12/O/N/11


18

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2011 4040/12/O/N/11


19

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2011 4040/12/O/N/11


20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2011 4040/12/O/N/11


UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
General Certificate of Education Ordinary Level
* 6 2 2 9 2 8 3 4 3 0 *

STATISTICS 4040/11
Paper 1 October/November 2011
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper.
Additional Materials: Mathematical tables
Pair of compasses
Protractor

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions in Section A and not more than four questions from Section B.
If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
The use of an electronic calculator is expected in this paper.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

DC (NH/DJ) 34282/4
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
2

Section A [36 marks]

Answer all of the questions 1 to 6.

1 In a biological experiment, a scientist measured the heights of a large number of plants. She
calculated the following statistical measures for the heights.

Median 12.3 cm
Lower quartile 7.9 cm
Upper quartile 16.5 cm
90th percentile 18.1 cm

(i) Write down the percentage of plants whose height is

(a) less than 12.3 cm,

....................................................[1]

(b) more than 7.9 cm,

....................................................[1]

(c) between 16.5 cm and 18.1 cm,

....................................................[1]

(d) less than 7.9 cm or more than 18.1 cm.

....................................................[1]

(ii) Using the above information, state whether you would expect the mean of this distribution
to be about the same as the median, smaller than the median, or larger than the median.
Explain briefly the reason for your answer.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/11/O/N/11


3

2 In a school class there are 10 boys and 20 girls. The teacher selects a sample of 6 pupils from the
class.

(i) In each case, write down the one word which best describes the method of sampling used
if she

(a) selects every 5th pupil from the class register,

....................................................[1]

(b) selects 2 of the boys and 4 of the girls at random from the class register,

....................................................[1]

(c) selects the first 3 boys and the first 3 girls who arrive for a lesson.

....................................................[1]

Having selected the sample, the teacher collects data from each pupil by asking three questions.

A How many brothers and sisters do you have?

B Is there a computer in your home?

C How much time did you spend doing your homework yesterday?

(ii) In each case, state whether the data obtained from these questions is either qualitative or
quantitative, and is either discrete or continuous.

For A, .................................................. and ..................................................

For B, .................................................. and ..................................................

For C, .................................................. and .................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2011 4040/11/O/N/11 [Turn over


4

3 The diagram below shows the number of people at an international conference who speak one or
more of the languages Arabic, French and Urdu.

Arabic French

13 9 16

3
5 2

10

Urdu

Use this information to find the number of people who speak

(i) Arabic,

....................................................[1]

(ii) Urdu and French but not Arabic,

....................................................[1]

(iii) French and Urdu,

....................................................[1]

(iv) exactly two of these languages,

....................................................[1]

(v) Arabic or Urdu (or both).

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/11/O/N/11


5

4 For a particular type of canned food, the nominal mass of food in the can (the mass written on
the can) is 450 g. A sample of 8 cans was chosen, and the actual mass of food in each can was
measured accurately. The following results (in grams) were obtained.

452.3 451.6 448.5 450.0 451.9 449.3 453.2 447.1

(i) Using an assumed mean equal to the nominal mass, find the mean and standard deviation
of these values.

Mean = ........................................................

Standard deviation = ....................................................[4]

(ii) The empty cans each have a mass of 180.0 g. Write down the mean and standard deviation
of the total mass of these cans of food.

Mean = ........................................................

Standard deviation = ....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/11/O/N/11 [Turn over


6

5 In a game, a turn involves throwing an unbiased six-sided dice with faces numbered 1 to 6, and, if
a 6 is thrown, a disc is chosen from a bag containing 1 black disc and 3 white discs.

Selections from the bag are made with replacement, and the person who chooses the black disc
wins the game.

Carlo and Dean throw alternately, with Carlo throwing first.

Find the probability that

(i) Carlo does not choose a disc from the bag on his first turn,

....................................................[1]

(ii) Carlo does not win on his first turn,

....................................................[2]

(iii) Dean wins on his second turn.

....................................................[3]

© UCLES 2011 4040/11/O/N/11


7

6 A team composed of equal numbers of men and women enters an athletics competition. In each
event it is possible to win a gold, silver or bronze medal. The team wins 25 medals, of which 3 are
gold, as shown in the following table.

Medals won by Medals won by


TOTAL
men women
Gold 3
Silver
Bronze
TOTAL 25

(i) The team wins equal numbers of silver and bronze medals. Use this information to insert two
numbers into the table.

[1]

(ii) The women win one more medal than the men. Use this information to insert two more
numbers into the table.

[1]

(iii) The women win only one gold medal, but they win twice as many silver medals as bronze
medals. Use this information to complete the table.

[2]

(iv) The head coach has a method of assessing performance overall by counting 4 points for a
gold medal, 2 points for a silver medal, and 1 point for a bronze medal. Using this method,
and showing all your working, find who have performed better, the men or the women.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/11/O/N/11 [Turn over


8

Section B [64 marks]

Answer not more than four of the questions 7 to 11.

Each question in this section carries 16 marks.

7 In this question give your answers either as fractions, or as decimals correct to 3 significant
figures.

In a hotel there are 25 rooms. The following table shows the number of guests staying in these
rooms on one particular night.

Number of guests 0 1 2 3 4
Number of rooms 3 4 12 5 1

For example, 5 rooms each have 3 guests staying in them.

(i) Find the total number of guests staying in the hotel on this night.

....................................................[3]

(ii) The hotel manager chooses a room at random to check the standard of cleaning. Find the
probability that

(a) it is an unoccupied room,

....................................................[1]

(b) it has at most 3 guests staying in it.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/11/O/N/11


9

(iii) The manager chooses a guest at random to ask if they like their room. Find the probability
that this guest is staying in a room

(a) with 2 other guests,

....................................................[3]

(b) with at least 2 other guests.

....................................................[3]

(iv) The manager chooses two guests at random. Find the probability that they are staying in the
same room.

....................................................[4]

© UCLES 2011 4040/11/O/N/11 [Turn over


10

8 A travel company collected data on the ages, x years, of the people who booked holidays with the
company. The results were formed into the following grouped frequency distribution.

Age, x (years) Number of people


20 – under 25 7
25 – under 35 16
35 – under 40 12
40 – under 45 14
45 – under 60 21
60 – under 80 10

(i) Estimate, to 3 significant figures, the mean and the standard deviation of the ages of the
people who booked holidays with the company.

Mean = ........................................................

Standard deviation = ....................................................[8]

© UCLES 2011 4040/11/O/N/11


11

(ii) On the following grid draw a histogram to illustrate the data in the table above. The rectangle
representing the 35 – under 40 class has already been drawn for you.

20

16

Number 12
of people
per 5
years 8

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Age (years)

[5]

(iii) On the same grid, draw a frequency polygon to represent the data. [1]

(iv) One year later the company repeated the research and found that the mean and standard
deviation of the ages were now 40.7 years and 16.1 years respectively. Explain briefly what
these values tell you about how the ages of people booking holidays had changed.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/11/O/N/11 [Turn over


12

9 A large company recorded the time spent travelling in one particular week by the 40 people in its
sales team. These times are illustrated in the cumulative frequency curve below.

40

30

Cumulative
frequency 20
(salespeople)

10

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Travelling time (hours)

(i) Use the graph to estimate

(a) the median of the travelling times,

........................................ hours [1]

(b) the interquartile range of the travelling times,

........................................ hours [4]

(c) the 80th percentile of the travelling times.

........................................ hours [2]

© UCLES 2011 4040/11/O/N/11


13

(ii) Use the graph to estimate the number of salespeople who spent more than 12.5 hours
travelling.

....................................................[3]

Because of the expense, the company wanted to reduce the time spent by its salespeople in
travelling. The sales team were given a training course on using the internet to improve sales
techniques. The table below shows the distribution of the team’s travelling times in a subsequent
week after the training.

Travelling time Number of


Cumulative frequency
(hours) salespeople
under 5 7
5 – under 10 13
10 – under 15 13
15 – under 20 5
20 – under 25 2
25 – under 30 0

(iii) Enter the cumulative frequencies for this distribution in the table. [1]

(iv) Draw the cumulative frequency curve for this distribution on the same grid as the given
cumulative frequency curve. [2]

(v) Use your graph to estimate the percentage reduction in the number of salespeople who spent
more than 12.5 hours travelling after the training. Give your answer to 2 significant figures.

....................................................[3]

© UCLES 2011 4040/11/O/N/11 [Turn over


14

10 Abdul is considering buying a particular model of new car. To see how well the car will keep its
value, he collects information on the price of old cars of this model. The information is given in the
following table.

Age of car (years), x 1.5 3.0 3.5 4.5 6.25 7.0 8.75 10.0
Price (thousands of $), y 13.2 11.8 10.5 9.4 7.0 6.8 4.4 2.6

(i) Draw a scatter diagram of these data on the grid below.

16

14

12

10
Price
(thousands 8
of $)
6

0 x
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Age of car (years)
[3]

(ii) Calculate the overall mean and the two semi-averages of the data, and plot them on your
graph.

[5]

© UCLES 2011 4040/11/O/N/11


15

(iii) Use your plotted averages to draw a line of best fit, and find its equation in the form y = mx + c.

....................................................[4]

(iv) Use your equation to estimate the price of a car of this model which is 5 years old.

$ ....................................................[2]

(v) Interpret the point at which the line of best fit meets the y-axis.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

Abdul’s friend Bruno also wants to buy a new car, but of a different model. Bruno does a similar
investigation on his chosen model of car, and obtains a line of best fit with equation y = 0.93x + 16.2.

(vi) Explain briefly why Bruno has probably made a mistake in his calculation.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2011 4040/11/O/N/11 [Turn over


16

11 In this question calculate all death rates per thousand. Where values do not work out exactly
give your answers to two decimal places.

The table below gives information on the population and deaths in the town of Bosco for the year
2010, together with the standard population of the area in which Bosco is situated.

Age group Standard


Age group Deaths Population
death rate population (%)
0 – 20 9 3600 18
21 – 50 33 7500 40
51 – 70 45 4000 30
Over 70 63 1750 12

(i) Calculate the crude death rate for Bosco.

............................................................[4]

(ii) Calculate the death rate for each age group, and insert the values in the table above.

[2]

(iii) Use your results from part (ii) to calculate the standardised death rate for Bosco.

............................................................[4]

© UCLES 2011 4040/11/O/N/11


17

Riva and Techno are two other towns in the same area. The table below gives data for these towns,
also for 2010.

Crude Death Rate Standardised Death


Town Population
(per thousand) Rate (per thousand)
Riva 18 200 8.79 8.21
Techno 15 000 9.60 9.65

(iv) Showing all your working, find which of the three towns experienced the largest number of
total deaths in 2010.

....................................................[3]

(v) State, giving a reason, which of the three towns appears to have the healthiest environment.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

(vi) Considering your answers to parts (iv) and (v) together, explain briefly what has caused this
situation to occur.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2011 4040/11/O/N/11


18

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2011 4040/11/O/N/11


19

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2011 4040/11/O/N/11


20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2011 4040/11/O/N/11


Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge Ordinary Level
* 5 2 6 0 3 0 4 6 5 5 *

STATISTICS 4040/12
Paper 1 October/November 2014
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper.
Additional Materials: Pair of compasses
Protractor

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions in Section A and not more than four questions from Section B.
If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
The use of an electronic calculator is expected in this paper.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

DC (LK/SLM) 102872/4 R
© UCLES 2014 [Turn over
2

Section A [36 marks]

Answer all of the questions 1 to 6.

1 In an industrial process, readings, x, of a particular gauge are recorded regularly. For 6 such
recorded readings it is found that Σx = 279 and Σx2 = 13 093.

(i) Find the mean and standard deviation of x.

Mean = .......................................................

Standard deviation = ...................................................[4]

It was discovered later that one of the readings had been incorrectly recorded as 43, when in fact
the correct reading was 34.

(ii) State, for each of the mean and standard deviation, whether its correct value will be smaller
than, larger than, or the same as the value found in part (i).

Mean .......................................................

Standard deviation ...................................................[2]

© UCLES 2014 4040/12/O/N/14


3

2 A student calculated, correctly, five statistical measures for a set of data. The five values he
obtained were, in ascending order, 6, 36, 43, 48 and 53.

(i) Insert these values in their correct positions in the table below.

Statistical measure Value


Median
Lower quartile
Upper quartile
Standard deviation
Variance
[5]

(ii) State the value of the 75th percentile for the student’s original set of data.

....................................................[1]

© UCLES 2014 4040/12/O/N/14 [Turn over


4

3 A national government plans a survey to obtain the responses of its citizens to its proposal to build
wind farms as sources of renewable energy.

(i) The following survey methods are considered.

A Questionnaires will be mailed to 1000 citizens.

B Face to face interviews will be conducted with a total of 1000 citizens in shopping centres
in different parts of the country.

C A questionnaire will be placed on the Internet inviting responses from anyone.

D Telephone calls will be made to 1000 citizens chosen from the telephone directory.

(a) Explain why method D would produce a biased sample.

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(b) Give one advantage of method B over method A.

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(c) Give one advantage and one disadvantage of method C.

Advantage ..........................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

Disadvantage .....................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[2]

(ii) A closed question which will be asked in the survey is as follows.

Are you in favour of wind farms being built in your area?

Yes

No

(a) Give one disadvantage of asking closed questions.

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(b) Write down one open question which could be asked in the survey.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2014 4040/12/O/N/14
5

4 The following diagram is to show the number of patients at a medical centre who have received
vaccine against one or more of the diseases polio, cholera and typhoid.

Polio

24

30
17

Cholera Typhoid

(i) Complete the diagram using the following information.

(a) The number of patients who have received only cholera vaccine is 5 fewer than the
number of patients who have received only polio vaccine. [1]

(b) The number of patients who have received only typhoid vaccine is two thirds of the
number of patients who have received polio and cholera vaccines but not typhoid vaccine.
[1]

(c) The number of patients who have received polio and typhoid vaccines but not cholera
vaccine is the same as the number of patients who have received all three vaccines. [1]

(d) Twice as many patients have received typhoid and cholera vaccines but not polio vaccine
as have received all three vaccines. [1]

(ii) Find the mode of the number of these vaccines received by these patients.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2014 4040/12/O/N/14 [Turn over


6

5 The table below gives information on the gender of, and number of books written by, 40 authors
attending a book fair.

Number of books written


TOTAL
1–5 6 – 10 11 – 15 More than 15
Male 5 6 3 1 15
Female 12 8 4 1 25
TOTAL 17 14 7 2 40

One of these authors is chosen at random to speak at the opening ceremony.

Find the probability of choosing

(i) a male,

....................................................[1]

(ii) a female who has written 11 or more books,

....................................................[1]

(iii) an author who has written 6 – 10 books, given that the author is male.

....................................................[1]

Two authors are chosen at random to lead discussion groups.

(iv) Find the probability that both have written 5 or fewer books.

....................................................[3]

© UCLES 2014 4040/12/O/N/14


7

6 A police camera at the side of a road measures the speed, in km/h, of every vehicle travelling on
the road.
The following histogram represents the information it recorded over a certain period of time.

50

40

30
Number of
vehicles
per 10 km/h
20

10

0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Vehicle speed (km/h)

Use the histogram to find, for this period of time, the number of vehicles whose speeds were

(i) from 50 km/h to under 80 km/h,

....................................................[2]

(ii) from 80 km/h to under 100 km/h,

....................................................[2]

(iii) under 50 km/h.

....................................................[1]

The speed limit on this road is 100 km/h. Any driver of a vehicle travelling at a speed which is
5 km/h or more greater than the speed limit must pay a fine.

(iv) Estimate the number of drivers represented by this information who had to pay a fine.

....................................................[1]

© UCLES 2014 4040/12/O/N/14 [Turn over


8

Section B [64 marks]

Answer not more than four of the questions 7 to 11.

Each question in this section carries 16 marks.

7 In this question calculate all accident rates per thousand. Where values do not work out
exactly give your answers to one decimal place.

The table below gives information on the number of employees, and the number of accidents
they suffered, at a building construction company, Kwikbuild, in the year 2012. It also shows the
standard population for the building construction industry.

Number of Number of Job group Standard


Job group
accidents employees accident rate population (%)
Management 1 25 8
Office
8 167 35
Administration
Site Supervision 3 40 12
Site Labour 37 228 45

(i) Calculate the crude accident rate for Kwikbuild.

....................................................[4]

(ii) Calculate the accident rate for each job group and insert the values in the table above.

[2]

© UCLES 2014 4040/12/O/N/14


9

(iii) Use your results from part (ii) to calculate the standardised accident rate for Kwikbuild.

....................................................[4]

Fastbuild is another building construction company. In 2012 its crude and standardised accident
rates were 109.4 and 98.7 per thousand respectively.

(iv) State, with a reason, which of the two companies most likely operates in the safer environment.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

For each company some of the accidents suffered by employees were classed as ‘serious’, and
they all occurred in the Site Labour job group.
The table below gives information on the serious accidents suffered at the two companies.

Number of serious Number of


Job group Company
accidents employees
Kwikbuild 7 228
Site Labour
Fastbuild 5 154

(v) Calculate, for each company, for the Site Labour job group only, the serious accident rate, and
hence state the company where an employee is less likely to suffer a serious accident.

....................................................[2]

(vi) State, with a reason, whether the values you have calculated in part (v) are crude or
standardised rates.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2014 4040/12/O/N/14 [Turn over


10

8 A running club holds a cross-country race. Competitors enter in either the junior or senior age
category. When they enter, they also choose to follow one of three routes: easy, moderate or
challenging. Information about the number of competitors and the routes chosen is shown below.

Number of competitors entering the race by age category

= 10 junior competitors
= 10 senior competitors

Percentages of junior entrants Percentages of senior entrants


by choice of route by choice of route

10%
25%
Easy Easy
45%
Moderate Moderate
35% 55%
Challenging Challenging
30%

(i) Find the total number of competitors who entered the race.

....................................................[1]

(ii) Show that there were 42 junior competitors who chose the moderate route.

[1]

(iii) Find the number of senior competitors who chose the easy route.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2014 4040/12/O/N/14


11

Not all the entrants completed the race. The times taken by those who did complete the race are
shown in the table below.

Number of competitors
Completion time
Junior Senior
(minutes)
Easy Moderate Challenging Easy Moderate Challenging
60 – under 90 16 4 0 19 3 2
90 – under 120 29 12 1 32 15 5
120 – under 150 18 15 3 20 17 14
150 – under 180 2 8 6 0 11 16
TOTAL 65 39 10 71 46 37

(iv) Find the number of competitors who entered the race but did not complete it.

....................................................[3]

(v) Estimate, to the nearest minute, the mean time taken by senior competitors who completed
the challenging route.

....................................................[3]

(vi) Of the junior competitors who completed the race in 2 hours or more, find the percentage who
had chosen the challenging route.

....................................................[3]

(vii) Of all the senior competitors who had chosen the moderate route, find the percentage who
completed the race in under 2 hours.

....................................................[3]

© UCLES 2014 4040/12/O/N/14 [Turn over


12

9 One way to determine if an adult has a healthy weight, independent of age and gender, is to
measure their body mass index, BMI (a continuous variable).
The BMI values for the adult population of a particular country in the years 1980 and 2010 are
summarised in the cumulative frequency polygons below.

100

90
1980 2010
80

70

Cumulative 60
frequency
(% of adult 50
population)
40

30

20

10

0
0 15 20 25 30 35 40
BMI

Use these graphs to answer the following questions on the adult population of this country.

(i) Estimate

(a) the median BMI value in 1980,

....................................................[1]

(b) the median BMI value in 2010,

....................................................[1]

(c) the lower quartile BMI value in 1980,

....................................................[1]

(d) the upper quartile BMI value in 2010.

....................................................[1]

© UCLES 2014 4040/12/O/N/14


13

An adult’s weight is classified as ‘healthy’ if their BMI value is between 18.5 and 25.

(ii) Estimate the percentage of the adult population whose weights were classified as ‘healthy’

(a) in 1980,

....................................................[2]

(b) in 2010.

....................................................[1]

An adult is classified as ‘overweight’ if their BMI value is 25 or more.

(iii) Estimate the median BMI value of the ‘overweight’ adult population in 2010.

....................................................[3]

Adults with the highest BMI values are classified as ‘obese’.


In 1980, 7% of the adult population were ‘obese’.

(iv) Estimate the percentage of the adult population in 2010 who were ‘obese’.

....................................................[4]

(v) By referring to any of the values you have estimated in parts (i), (ii), and (iv), comment on
how the health of the adult population of this country, assessed in terms of its weight, changed
between 1980 and 2010.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2014 4040/12/O/N/14 [Turn over


14

10 Baruti’s teacher has suggested that pupils who enjoy studying a subject are likely to perform well
in tests in the subject.
To investigate this, Baruti asked his friends to rate their enjoyment of Statistics on a linear scale
from 0 (dislike very much) to 5 (like very much), then recorded their scores on the next class test.
His results are shown in the following table.

Friend A B C D E F G H
Enjoyment
3 2 5 4 1 4 5 2
rating, x
Test score
57 47 78 59 26 86 53 34
(%), y

(i) Plot these data on the grid below.

y
100

80

60
Test
score
(%)
40

20

0 x
0 1 2 3 4 5
Enjoyment rating
[2]

(ii) Explain briefly why the points (5, 78) and (4, 59) are not used if the lower semi-average is
calculated.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2014 4040/12/O/N/14


15

(iii) Calculate the two semi-averages and the overall mean of the data, and plot them on your
graph.

[5]

(iv) Use your plotted averages to draw a line of best fit, and find its equation in the form y = mx + c.

....................................................[4]

Another friend, who had rated his enjoyment of Statistics at 3, missed the test through illness.

(v) Use the line you have drawn in part (iv) to estimate the score this friend would have obtained
if he had taken the test.

....................................................[1]

Baruti repeated his investigations for English and Science.


The equations he found for the lines of best fit were

y = 1.24x + 53.8 for English


and y = 13.8x + 15.1 for Science.

(vi) State, with a reason, in which of the subjects Statistics, English and Science a pupil’s test
score is most affected by their enjoyment rating.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

(vii) Explain briefly why Baruti may have experienced difficulty in deciding which of his two
variables should be the independent and which the dependent.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2014 4040/12/O/N/14 [Turn over


16

11 At a restaurant it is known from experience that 10% of the customers order an omelette.

Assume that customers make choices independently of each other and that nobody orders more
than one omelette.

(i) At table A there are 2 customers.

Find the probability that at this table an omelette is ordered by

(a) no customers,

....................................................[2]

(b) at least one customer.

....................................................[2]

The restaurant serves small omelettes and large omelettes. It is known from experience that 60%
of those ordered are small and 40% are large.

(ii) At table B there are 4 customers.

Find the probability that at this table only one customer orders an omelette and it is a large
omelette.

....................................................[4]

© UCLES 2014 4040/12/O/N/14


17

Small omelettes are made with 2 eggs and large omelettes with 3 eggs. The chef has a special
store of high quality eggs which are used only for making omelettes.

(iii) At table C there are 3 customers.

Find the probability that, in preparing the food for this table, from his special store the chef
uses

(a) exactly 4 eggs,

....................................................[3]

(b) at most 4 eggs.

....................................................[5]

© UCLES 2014 4040/12/O/N/14


18

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2014 4040/12/O/N/14


19

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2014 4040/12/O/N/14


20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2014 4040/12/O/N/14


CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
Cambridge Ordinary Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2014 series

4040 STATISTICS
4040/12 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 100

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2014 series for
most Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.


Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2014 4040 12

1 (i) correct method for mean M1


46.5 A1
correct method for SD or variance M1
4.46 or better A1

(ii) mean smaller B1


SD larger B1

2 (i) SD/variance = 6, 36 or 36, 6 M1


SD = 6 and variance = 36 A1
med = 48 B1
LQ = 43 B1
UQ = 53 B1

if zero scored allow SC1 for their LQ, their med, their UQ in ascending order

(ii) their UQ B1

3 (i) (a) citizens not in the telephone directory excluded B1

(b) better response rate/questions can be clarified by interviewer B1

(c) can reach a wide range of people/efficient distribution/


responses obtained very quickly B1

excludes those without internet access/


responses may be from non citizens B1

(ii) (a) limited number of answers to questions possible/


respondent may feel none of allowed answers appropriate B1

(b) any relevant open question B1

4 (i) (a) 19 in correct place B1

(b) 20 in correct place B1

(c) 17 in correct place B1

(d) 34 in correct place B1

(ii) attempt to find frequencies for variable values 1, 2 (63, 81) M1


2 A1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014


Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2014 4040 12

5 (i) 15/40 or 3/8 or 0.375 B1

(ii) 5/40 or 1/8 or 0.125 B1

(iii) 6/15 or 2/5 or 0.4 B1

(iv) (17/40) × M1
(their 17 – 1)/(their 40 – 1) M1
272/1560 or 136/780 or 68/390 or 34/195 or 0.174 or 0.17 A1

6 (i) addition of scale readings of 10 km/h wide columns (26 + 43 + 47) M1


116 A1

(ii) appreciation of area being proportional to frequency


(may be earned here or in (iii) or (iv)) M1
62 A1

(iii) 40 A1

(iv) 6 A1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014


Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2014 4040 12

7 (i) 1 + 8 + 3 + 37 (=49) M1
25 + 167 + 40 + 228 (=460) M1
(their 49/their 460) × 1000 M1
106.5 A1

(ii) correct method for any job group M1


40 47.9 75 162.3 A1

(iii) any one job group rate multiplied by standard population figure M1
sum of four such products M1
(40 × 0.08) + (47.9 × 0.35) + (75 × 0.12) + (162.3 × 0.45) A1
102 or 102.0 A1

(iv) because its standardised accident rate is lower M1


Fastbuild A1

(v) Kwikbuild 30.7 (or Fastbuild 32.5) B1


Fastbuild 32.5 (or Kwikbuild 30.7) and Kwikbuild B1

(vi) crude B1*


standardised rate is to eliminate differences in population structures
so is meaningless for one category B1dep

8 (i) 280 B1

(ii) (35/100) × 120 AG B1

(iii) (45/100) × 160 M1


72 A1

(iv) number completing = 65 + 39 + 10 + 71 + 46 + 37 (=268) M1


their (i) – their 268 M1
12 A1

(v) attempted use of class mid points (75, 105, 135, 165) M1*
correct method for mean (Σfx = 5205) M1dep
141 A1

(vi) finds 18 + 2 + 15 + 8 + 3 + 6 (=52) M1*


((3 + 6)/their 52) × 100 M1dep
17.3% or better or 17% A1

(vii) finds 30% of 160 (=48) M1*


((3 + 15)/their 48) × 100 M1dep
37.5% or 38% A1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014


Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2014 4040 12

9 (i) (a) 23.5–23.8 B1

(b) 26.2–26.5 B1

(c) 21.2–21.5 B1

(d) 29.5–29.8 B1

(ii) (a) attempt to read cf% values for BMI = 18.5 and 25 and subtract
on either graph (65 – 7) (40 – 4) M1
57(%)–59(%) A1

(b) 36(%) A1

(iii) 60% overweight B1


attempt to read BMI for cf% = 40% + ½ × 60% (=70%) on 2010 graph M1
28.8–29.1 A1

(iv) attempt to read BMI for cf% = 93% on 1980 graph M1


30 A1

Attempt to read cf% for BMI = 30 on 2010 graph M1


22(%) A1

(v) population has become more unhealthy, with specific support


median BMI increased
or percentage healthy decreased
or percentage obese increased B1

support strengthened by
reference to more than one of these changes
or citation of specific values for any change B1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014


Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2014 4040 12

10 (i) correctly plotted points B2


allow B1 for 6 or 7 correctly plotted

(ii) not in the set of four lowest x values


or any indication of need to order data by x values first B1

(iii) method for calculating either semi-average M1


plot of (2, 41) A1
plot of (4.5, 69) A1
method for calculating overall mean M1
plot of (3.25, 55) A1

(iv) straight line through at least two of their plotted points in (iii) B1
correct method for gradient, m, of their line M1
correct method for c M1
m = 11.0 – 11.4 and c = 18 – 19 A1

(v) 52 B1

(vi) because its line has the greatest gradient oe M1


Science (or Statistics if their m > 13.8) A1

(vii) difficult to know if pupils perform well because they like a subject,
or they like a subject because they perform well in it B1

11 (i) (a) (0.9)2 M1


0.81 or equiv fraction A1

(b) 1 – their 0.81 or (0.1 × 0.9 × 2) + (0.1)2 M1


0.19 or equiv fraction A1

(ii) 0.1 × 0.4 M1


× (0.9)3 M1
×4 M1
0.11664 or 0.1166 or 0.117 or 0.12 or equiv fraction (729/6250) A1

(iii) (a) (0.1 × 0.6)2 M1


× 0.9 × 3 M1
0.00972 or 0.0097 or equiv fraction (243/25000) A1

(b) (0.1 × 0.4) × (0.9)2 × 3 (L, not O, not O) (0.0972) M1


(0.1 × 0.6) × (0.9)2 × 3 (S, not O, not O) (0.1458) M1
(0.9)3 (not O, not O, not O) (0.729) M1
addition of their 0.00972, their 0.0972, their 0.1458, their 0.729 M1
0.98172 or 0.9817 or 0.982 or 0.98 or equiv fraction (24543/25000) A1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014


Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge Ordinary Level
* 9 7 3 9 6 3 0 9 8 7 *

STATISTICS 4040/13
Paper 1 October/November 2014
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper.
Additional Materials: Pair of compasses
Protractor

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or corrections fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions in Section A and not more than four questions from Section B.
If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
The use of an electronic calculator is expected in this paper.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

DC (RW/SLM) 83695/3
© UCLES 2014 [Turn over
2

Section A [36 marks]

Answer all of the questions 1 to 6.

1 The number of passengers on each of 13 consecutive buses arriving at a terminus were

7 8 16 10 20 5 8 9 8 2 26 9 15 .

Three different measures of central tendency (average) of these numbers are 8, 9 and 11.

Complete the following table by giving, for each of these three measures, its name and a brief
explanation of how its value has been obtained.

Measure Name How obtained

..................................................................................................

8 ............................ ..................................................................................................

..................................................................................................

..................................................................................................

9 ............................ ..................................................................................................

..................................................................................................

..................................................................................................

11 ............................ ..................................................................................................

..................................................................................................

[6]

© UCLES 2014 4040/13/O/N/14


3

2 The variable X is illustrated in the cumulative frequency graph below.

50

40

30
Cumulative
frequency

20

10

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X

(i) State, with a reason, whether the variable X is continuous or discrete.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

(ii) State for which of the integer values shown in the graph the frequency of X is 0.

....................................................[2]

(iii) Complete the following table.

x 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Frequency
[2]

© UCLES 2014 4040/13/O/N/14 [Turn over


4

3 (a) The population of a town is tabulated in different age groups. A research organisation wishes
to interview, from the population, a sample which represents it in terms of age. It proposes to
do this using either stratified random sampling or quota sampling.

State one way in which the use of these sampling methods would be similar, and one way in
which it would be different.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

(b) It is wished to obtain an estimate of the mean number of words on each page of a book. For
each of the following methods state, with a reason, whether a sample obtained using it would
be likely to be biased or unbiased:

(i) counting the number of words on the last page of each chapter;

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[2]

(ii) counting the number of words on a systematic sample of pages.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2014 4040/13/O/N/14


5

4 The table below summarises the lengths, in millimetres, of a random sample of 50 leaves taken
from a bush.

Length (mm) Frequency Cumulative frequency


Under 30 0
30 – under 32 8
32 – under 34 10
34 – under 36 17
36 – under 38 11
38 – under 40 4

(i) Calculate the cumulative frequencies and insert them in the table. [1]

(ii) Plot the cumulative frequencies on the grid below and draw a smooth curve through the
plotted points. [2]

50

40

30

Cumulative
frequency
20

10

0
0 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42
Length (mm)

(iii) Use your graph to estimate

(a) the lower quartile length,

.............................................mm [1]

(b) the percentage of leaves that have a length greater than 37.2 mm.

....................................................[2]
© UCLES 2014 4040/13/O/N/14 [Turn over
6

5 A company which produces different sizes of sawn wood wishes to display information about the
amount of sawn wood it produces in each of two consecutive years.

(i) State one advantage and one disadvantage of using a dual bar chart, as opposed to a
percentage bar chart, to illustrate the amount produced in the two years.

Advantage..................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

Disadvantage .............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

(ii) Name a quantity which neither a dual bar chart nor a percentage bar chart would show.

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

(iii) State the names of two types of diagram which will give a relative indication of both the
amount of different sizes of sawn wood and the total amount of sawn wood produced in each
year.

........................................................

....................................................[2]

(iv) State the name of the type of diagram which will give a direct indication of the differences in
the total amount of sawn wood produced from one year to the next.

....................................................[1]

© UCLES 2014 4040/13/O/N/14


7

6 Three of the official languages of Switzerland are French, German and Romansh. The diagram
below illustrates which of these languages are spoken by a random sample of 70 Swiss citizens.

French German

17 8 23

0
3 2

12

Romansh

(i) Find the value which should be written inside the box but outside the circles in order to
complete the diagram.

....................................................[2]

(ii) Interpret the value 0 in the diagram.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

(iii) State, with a reason, in each of the following cases, whether the value 0 would be changed if
the person described learned to speak Romansh.

(a) One of the people denoted in the diagram by the value 17.

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(b) One of the people denoted in the diagram by the value 8.

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(c) One of the people denoted in the diagram by your answer to part (i).

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2014 4040/13/O/N/14 [Turn over
8

Section B [64 marks]

Answer not more than four of the questions 7 to 11.

Each question in this section carries 16 marks.

7 (a) Mr Hassan can travel to work by either car or train. The probability that on any day he travels
by train is 47. If he travels by car the probability that he will be late for work is 19, but by train it is 15.

Calculate the probability that on any randomly chosen day he is not late for work.

....................................................[4]

(b) Three children are to be chosen at random from a group of seven, consisting of four boys,
Ian, James, Michael and Nathan, and three girls, Karen, Lucy and Olive.

(i) Calculate the probability that Ian, Lucy and Nathan are the three chosen.

....................................................[2]

Two of the seven are a brother and sister.

(ii) Calculate the probability that the brother and sister will both be among the three chosen.

....................................................[3]

© UCLES 2014 4040/13/O/N/14


9

(c) Sammy and Pekos each have a bag containing a number of blue balls and white balls. Each
selects one ball from his bag at random. If the selected balls are of the same colour, Sammy
puts them both in his bag; if they are of different colours, Pekos puts them both in his bag.

Originally, Sammy’s bag contains 2 blue and 6 white balls, while Pekos’ bag contains 3 blue
and 5 white balls.

(i) Calculate the probability that both selected balls are of the same colour.

....................................................[3]

(ii) If, on the first selection, the balls were of the same colour (so both were put in Sammy’s
bag before a second selection), calculate the probability that on the second selection the
balls are of different colours.

....................................................[4]

© UCLES 2014 4040/13/O/N/14 [Turn over


10

8 The following table summarises the times, x minutes, which the visitors to an art gallery during
one day spent in the gallery. The first row of the table gives the column numbers.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)


Time, x (minutes) Frequency, f m y fy fy 2
0 – under 30 6
30 – under 35 11
35 – under 40 4
40 – under 50 40
50 – under 60 26
60 – under 70 14
70 – under 100 4
TOTAL 105

(i) Insert in column (3) of the table the mid-points, m, of each of the classes.

[1]
m − 45
(ii) Values of a variable, y, are given by y= .
2.5
Calculate the value of y for each class and insert the values in column (4) of the table.

[2]

(iii) For each class, calculate the value of the product fy, and insert the values in column (5) of the
table. [1]

(iv) For each class, calculate the value of fy 2, and insert the values in column (6) of the table.

[1]

(v) Calculate Σfy and Σfy 2 and insert their values in the table. [1]

© UCLES 2014 4040/13/O/N/14


11

(vi) Estimate the mean of y.

....................................................[2]

(vii) Estimate the standard deviation of y.

....................................................[2]

(viii) Use your results to parts (vi) and (vii) to estimate

(a) the mean of x,

....................................................[2]

(b) the standard deviation of x.

....................................................[2]

(ix) Comment on whether or not, for these data, the interquartile range would be a more
appropriate measure of dispersion than the standard deviation.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2014 4040/13/O/N/14 [Turn over


12

9 A bakery kept a record of the diameters, d centimetres, of the cakes it produced during one week.
The results are summarised in the histogram below.

50

40

Number 30
of cakes
per cm of
diameter 20

10

0
0 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Diameter (cm)

(i) Use the histogram to complete the following grouped frequency table for d.

Diameter, d (cm) Frequency


15 – under 17
17 – under 18
18 – under 19
19 – under 19.5
19.5 – under 20
20 – under 20.5
20.5 – under 21
21 – under 23
[4]

© UCLES 2014 4040/13/O/N/14


13

(ii) Use the frequencies you have obtained to produce a simpler grouped frequency distribution,
having four classes of equal width between 15 cm and 23 cm, and present your distribution in
a table.

[3]

(iii) On the grid below illustrate your simpler grouped frequency distribution by a histogram.

[3]

(iv) Use the histogram you have drawn in part (iii) to estimate the modal diameter.

.............................................. cm [2]

(v) Cakes with a diameter between 16.5 cm and 22 cm can be sold in the bakery’s shop. Find the
percentage of this week’s cakes which can be sold in the shop.

....................................................[4]
© UCLES 2014 4040/13/O/N/14 [Turn over
14

10 In this question calculate all death rates per thousand, and to 2 decimal places.

The first table below gives certain information about the population and deaths in a town, Eastbury,
for the year 2012, together with the standard population of the area in which Eastbury is situated.

Population in Standard
Age group Deaths
age group population (%)
0 – 14 25 4500 20
15 – 34 x 7000 35
35 – 59 47 6000 25
60 and over 83 7000 20

(i) The death rate for the 15 – 34 age group is 3.00 per thousand.
Show that x = 21.

[1]

(ii) Calculate the crude death rate for Eastbury.

....................................................[4]

(iii) Calculate the death rates for the other three age groups.

0 – 14 age group ........................................................

35 – 59 age group ........................................................

60 and over age group ....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2014 4040/13/O/N/14


15

(iv) Using the given rate for the 15 – 34 age group, and the rates you have calculated in part (iii),
calculate the standardised death rate for Eastbury.

....................................................[4]

The table below gives information about Westville, another town in the same area, for the year
2012.
The crude death rate for Westville in 2012 was 6.62 per thousand.

Death rate per Population in


Age group
thousand age group (%)
0 – 14 4 35
15 – 34 3 25
35 – 59 5 27
60 and over 24 13

(v) Calculate the standardised death rate for Westville, using the same standard population as
for Eastbury.

....................................................[2]

One of the two towns has a higher crude death rate, but the other has a higher standardised death
rate.

(vi) Give a brief explanation of why such a situation can occur.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

(vii) State, with a reason, which of the two towns would appear to have the healthier environment.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2014 4040/13/O/N/14 [Turn over
16

11 Three trainee technicians, A, B and C, carried out laboratory trials to examine the effect of
temperature, x, in °C, on the yield, y, in kg, of an industrial process. The following table shows the
results obtained by each technician.

Technician A B C A B C A B C A B C
Temperature, x (°C) 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
Yield, y (kg) 80 106 75 90 117 118 97 127 80 109 140 115

(i) Plot the points representing these results on the grid below and label each point A, B or C
according to which technician carried out the trial.

140

130

120

110

100
Yield
(kg)

90

80

70

60

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Temperature (°C)
[3]

© UCLES 2014 4040/13/O/N/14


17

(ii) Calculate and plot the overall mean.

[3]

The two semi-averages are (22.5, 97.7) and (52.5, 111.3).

(iii) Plot the semi-averages and use the three plotted averages to draw the line of best fit. [3]

It is known that over this range of temperatures the relationship between yield and temperature is
approximately linear.

(iv) Comment on the results obtained by the three trainees.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

An experienced and reliable technician carried out a trial at a temperature of 40°C and obtained a
yield of 125 kg.

(v) Plot the experienced technician’s result on the graph. [1]

(vi) What might this extra information tell you about the performance of the trainees?

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

(vii) Use the extra information to draw, by eye, a revised line of best fit. [1]

(viii) Use this revised line of best fit to estimate the yield for a temperature of 52°C.

............................................... kg [1]

© UCLES 2014 4040/13/O/N/14


18

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2014 4040/13/O/N/14


19

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2014 4040/13/O/N/14


20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2014 4040/13/O/N/14


CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
Cambridge Ordinary Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2014 series

4040 STATISTICS
4040/13 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 100

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2014 series for
most Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.


Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2014 4040 13

1 8 is the mode M1
The value which occurs most frequently. A1

9 is the median M1
Obtained by arranging the values in ascending or descending order and
selecting the 'middle' one. A1

11 is the (Arithmetic) mean M1


Obtained by summing the numbers and then dividing by 13. A1

2 (i) X is discrete B1*


Because it only takes integer values (or equivalent comment) B1dep

(ii) 0 and 4 (B1 for each) B2

(iii)
x 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Frequency 0 5 15 10 0 7 6 7

(–1 each independent error) B2

3 (a) Similar in that both would sample proportionately from the different age groups. B1
In stratified sampling interviewers would be given a list of specific people to
interview, in quota sampling the interviewer selects the individuals. B1

(b) (i) Because the last page of a chapter is less likely than all other others to be
filled with words, B1
the sample is likely to be biased. B1

(ii) A systematic sample is a form of random sampling B1


and so unless there is some pattern in the pages which matches the sampling
interval the sample will be unbiased. B1

4 (i) 0 8 18 35 46 50 (all correct) B1

(ii) All points plotted correctly both horizontally and vertically B1


Plotted points connected by a suitable smooth curve B1

(iii) (a) Correct reading from graph of a point between cum. freqs. 12 and 13 B1

(b) Clear attempt to use appropriate point on the graph and any valid method
to find the required percentage. M1
14%–16% A1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014


Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2014 4040 13

5 (i) Advantage: it shows actual amounts of wood. B1


Disadvantage: it only shows information about individual sizes. B1

(ii) The total amount of wood of all sizes produced. B1

(iii) Pie chart B1


Sectional (component) bar chart B1

(iv) Change chart B1

6 (i) Attempt to sum the values in the diagram and subtract the total from 70. M1
5 A1

(ii) None of the people in the sample speak all three languages. B1

(iii) (a) No, because this person will still only speak two languages. B1

(b) Yes, because the person now speaks all three languages. B1

(c) No, as this person only speaks one of the three languages. B1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014


Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2014 4040 13

7 (a) Sight of 3/7 used B1


EITHER 1 – sum of two two-factor products M1
1 – [(4/7 × 1/5) + (3/7 × 1/9)] A1
88/105 A1

OR Sight of 4/5 and 8/9 used M1


(4/7 × 4/5) + (3/7 × 8/9) A1
88/105 A1

(b) (i) EITHER 3/7 × 2/6 × 1/5 OR 1/7 × 1/6 × 1/5 × 3! M1


1/35 A1

(ii) Any appreciation of the fact that it is irrelevant which two are the
brother and sister. B1

EITHER 1/7 × 1/6 (× 1) × 3! OR 5/7 × 1/6 × 1/5 × 3! M1


1/7 A1

(c) (i) Clear attempt at both two blue and two white M1
(2/8 × 3/8) + (6/8 × 5/8) A1
9/16 A1

(ii) Given first balls were the same colour, P(both were blue) = 1/6,
P(both were white) = 5/6 B1

Attempt to add probabilities relating to whether first balls were blue or white M1

(1/6)[(3/9 × 5/7) + (6/9 × 2/7)] + (5/6)[(2/9 × 4/7) + (7/9 × 3/7)] A1


86/189 = 0.455 A1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014


Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2014 4040 13

8
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Time (x)
Frequency (f) Mid-pts (m) y fy fy²
(minutes)

0 – under 30 6 15 –12 –72 864

30 – under 35 11 32.5 –5 –55 275

35 – under 40 4 37.5 –3 –12 36

40 – under 50 40 45 0 0 0

50 – under 60 26 55 4 104 416

60 – under 70 14 65 8 112 896

70 – under 100 4 85 16 64 1024

TOTAL 105 141 3511

(i) Mid-points correct B1

(ii) Values of y found correctly M1


y values correct A1

(iii) fy values found correctly M1

(iv) fy² values found correctly M1

(v) Summations correct A1

(vi) Use of their values in a correct method for mean of y M1


Mean of y = 1.34 A1

(vii) Use of their values in a correct formula for variance or s.d. of y M1


s.d. of y = 5.62 A1

(viii) (a) (Their y mean × 2.5) + 45 M1


48.4 A1

(b) (Their y s.d. × 2.5) only M1


14.1 A1

(ix) The distribution is reasonably symmetrical with relatively


few extreme values, (or similar comment), M1
and so the s.d. is preferable to the IQR. A1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014


Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2014 4040 13

9 (i) 36 32 in second and third cells B1


Any appreciation of area being proportional to frequency M1
24 28 in first and last cells A1
21 18 22 19 in remaining cells A1

(ii) Correct classes, 15–17, 17–19 etc. M1


Correct frequencies 24 68 80 28 A1
Their results presented in a suitable table B1

(iii) Four rectangles of equal width M1


Vertical axis correctly annotated M1
Rectangles of correct heights A1

(iv) Use of ‘diagonal line’ on histogram or equivalent numerical method seen M1


19.35 cm A1

(v) Proportions of first and last classes found correctly M1


Total cakes which can be sold found correctly M1
Percentage expressed correctly M1
84% A1

10 (i) (3 × 7) or (3 × 7000)/1000 or equivalent seen AG B1

(ii) Total deaths 25 + 21 + 47 + 83 ( = 176) M1


Total population 4500 + 7000 + 6000 + 7000 (= 24500) M1
CDR = (Total deaths / Total population) × 1000 M1
= 7.18 A1

(iii) (Deaths/Population) × 1000 seen for any age group (or can be implied
by one correct result) M1
5.56 7.83 11.86 all correct A1

(iv) Rate × SP% seen for any age group (or can be implied by one correct result) M1

Attempt to sum results for all age groups M1


5.56 × 0.2 + 3 × 0.35 + 7.83 × 0.25 + 11.86 × 0.2 A1
6.49 A1

(v) Rate × SP% added for four groups M1


7.90 A1

(vi) Any valid comment relating to the towns having different age structures B1

(vii) Because the SDR is lower M1


Eastbury has the healthier environment. A1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014


Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2014 4040 13

11 (i) Correct plots (–1 each error) B2


Correct labels B1

(ii) (37.5,104.5) (B1 each coordinate) B2


Correct plot B1

(iii) Correct SA plots (B1 for each) B2


Line of best fit through at least two averages B1

(iv) A and B results are both approximately linear. B1


C results are completely inconsistent. B1

(v) Correct plot B1

(vi) Experienced technician’s result totally consistent with those of B, B1


suggesting that B’s observations are accurate. B1

(vii) Line drawn through results of B and the experienced technician B1

(viii) 135 kg, with clear indication value found from use of the revised line B1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014


Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge Ordinary Level
* 9 3 9 9 9 1 9 0 8 7 *

STATISTICS 4040/12
Paper 1 October/November 2015
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
Additional Materials: Pair of compasses
Protractor

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions in Section A and not more than four questions from Section B.
If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
The use of an electronic calculator is expected in this paper.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.

DC (ST/FD) 100433/3
© UCLES 2015 [Turn over
2

Section A [36 marks]

Answer all of the questions 1 to 6.

1 Four types of sample which may be obtained from a population by a researcher are:
simple random, stratified, quota, and systematic.

State for which of these types of sample

(i) the individual items are selected at regular intervals from a sampling frame,

....................................................[1]

(ii) the choice of which individual items are selected is left to the researcher,

....................................................[1]

(iii) the sample is selected so that the proportions of different categories in the sample correspond
with those of the population.

....................................................[1]

2 The frequency distribution of a discrete variable, X, is given in the table below.

x 1 2 3 4 5 6 or more
Frequency, f 3 6 4 5 6 7

For this distribution,

(i) name a measure of central tendency which cannot be found exactly,

....................................................[1]

(ii) name, but do not find, a measure of central tendency which can be found exactly,

....................................................[1]

(iii) name a measure of dispersion which cannot be found exactly,

....................................................[1]

(iv) name, and find, a measure of dispersion which can be found exactly.

Name .......................................................

....................................................[3]

© UCLES 2015 4040/12/O/N/15


3

3 Randa’s friend Sonia claims that, of the two drinks tea and coffee, males generally prefer tea,
whilst females generally prefer coffee. To investigate this Randa asks her friends and relatives
their preferences.

She records whether the person asked is male (M) or female (F), and whether they prefer tea (T)
or coffee (C), or express no preference (X).
Her raw data is as follows:

FC MT FC MX MC FC FT MC FC FC
FX MC FT FC MC FT FC MT FX MC

For example, the first person asked was female and preferred coffee.

(i) Summarise the data in a two-way table.

[4]

(ii) Explain whether or not Randa’s survey has shown Sonia’s claim to be correct.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2015 4040/12/O/N/15 [Turn over


4

4 A man owns three shops in a town. For a trial period of 12 days he offers for sale in each shop a
new type of chocolate bar.

He records the number of these bars sold each day in each shop over this period, and calculates
the measures shown in the table below for the daily sales in each shop.

Shop Mean Median Standard deviation


A 3.42 4 1.66
B 4.67 5 2.17
C 3.75 3.5 0.92

(i) State in which one of the shops, A, B or C, daily sales were

(a) generally highest,

....................................................[1]

(b) generally most similar,

....................................................[1]

(c) definitely fewer than 4 bars on six of the days.

....................................................[1]

(ii) Find the total number of these chocolate bars sold in all three shops combined over this
period.

....................................................[3]

© UCLES 2015 4040/12/O/N/15


5

5 In a game, a turn consists of throwing three unbiased six-sided dice, each with faces numbered
1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6. The score for a turn is the sum of any numbers which appear more than once.

For example, if 5, 2, 5 appear, the score is 10; if 5, 2, 1 appear, the score is zero.

(i) Write down four integers between 0 and 18 which it is impossible to score in one turn.

....................................................[2]

(ii) Find the probability of obtaining a score of 12 in one turn.

....................................................[5]

© UCLES 2015 4040/12/O/N/15 [Turn over


6

6 At a town centre car park the electronic barrier records the length of stay of all vehicles parked
there. When a vehicle leaves the car park, it is not allowed to return the same day.
The lengths of stay for the 120 vehicles using the car park on one particular day are summarised
in the graph below.

120

100

80

Cumulative
frequency 60
(vehicles)

40

20

0
0 2 4 6 8 10
Length of stay (hours)

(i) Write down the name of this type of graph.

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

Use the graph to estimate, in hours,

(ii) the median length of stay,

....................................................[1]

(iii) the 85th percentile length of stay.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2015 4040/12/O/N/15


7

For the first two hours parking is free. For stays lasting from 2 hours up to 5 hours the charge is $6,
from 5 hours up to 8 hours it is $9, and from 8 hours up to 10 hours it is $12.

(iv) Use the graph to estimate the total amount paid in parking charges on this particular day.

....................................................[4]

© UCLES 2015 4040/12/O/N/15 [Turn over


8

Section B [64 marks]

Answer not more than four of the questions 7 to 11.

Each question in this section carries 16 marks.

7 In a school science experiment, a beaker of hot water is allowed to cool, and its temperature is
measured every 5 minutes. The results are shown in the following table.

Time, x (minutes) 0 5 10 15 20 25

Temperature, y (°C) 96 76 61 49 42 38

(i) Calculate the overall mean and the two semi-averages of these data.

........................................................

........................................................

....................................................[5]

(ii) Use the values obtained in part (i) to find the equation of the line of best fit to these data in the
form y = mx + c.

....................................................[3]

(iii) Use your equation to estimate the temperature of the water after 30 minutes, giving your
answer to the nearest degree.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2015 4040/12/O/N/15


9

(iv) On the grid below, plot the data given in the table at the start of the question.

\
100

80

60

Temperature
(°C)
40

20

0 [
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Time (minutes)
[2]

(v) Draw on the grid the line whose equation you found in part (ii) for times between 0 and
30 minutes.

[2]

(vi) By inspecting the points plotted, explain briefly why it can be considered that it was
inappropriate to find a line of best fit in the form y = mx + c in this case.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

(vii) State how the actual water temperature after 30 minutes will compare with the value calculated
in part (iii).

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2015 4040/12/O/N/15 [Turn over


10

8 At a college, students are enrolled into one of four departments: Arts, Languages, Science, or
Technology. The ages of students in these departments, for the year 2014, are shown in the table
below. Students aged 25 – under 30 are classed as ‘mature’ students.

Department
Age (years)
Arts Languages Science Technology
18 – under 19 60 37 125 107
19 – under 20 78 50 153 138
20 – under 22 101 66 112 96
22 – under 25 62 72 84 70
25 – under 30 53 60 51 39
TOTAL 354 285 525 450

(i) Find the number of students at the college who are under 20 years of age.

....................................................[1]

(ii) Of all the students, show that the percentage who are enrolled in Science is 32.5%, correct to
3 significant figures.

[1]

(iii) Of all the students, find the percentage who are mature students.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2015 4040/12/O/N/15


11

(iv) On the grid below draw a histogram to illustrate the ages of students enrolled in Languages. The
rectangles representing the 18 – under 19 class and the 19 – under 20 class have already
been drawn for you.

70

60

50

40
Number of
students
per 1 year
30

20

10

0
0 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
Age (years)
[4]

© UCLES 2015 4040/12/O/N/15 [Turn over


12

At the end of the year, of all the students, 144 obtained distinctions in their examinations. The
departments in which these 144 students were enrolled are represented by the following pie chart,
which is drawn to scale.

$UWV
/DQJXDJHV

7HFKQRORJ\

6FLHQFH

(v) Find the number of students in Arts who obtained distinctions.

....................................................[2]

(vi) Of all the students enrolled in Science, find the percentage who obtained distinctions.

....................................................[3]

Half of the distinctions in Technology were earned by mature students.

(vii) Of all the mature students, find the percentage who obtained distinctions in Technology.

....................................................[3]

© UCLES 2015 4040/12/O/N/15


13

9 At an international sporting event, the team from a particular country includes swimmers and track
athletes.

(i) The diagram below shows the number of swimmers who are specialists in one or more of the
styles breaststroke, freestyle and backstroke.

%UHDVWVWURNH

 


  

)UHHVW\OH %DFNVWURNH

Use this information to find the number of these swimmers who are specialists in

(a) backstroke,

....................................................[1]

(b) breaststroke and freestyle,

....................................................[1]

(c) breaststroke and freestyle but not backstroke,

....................................................[1]

(d) breaststroke or backstroke or both.

....................................................[1]

One of these swimmers is chosen at random to appear on television. Find the probability of
choosing a specialist in

(e) exactly two of these styles,

....................................................[1]

(f) freestyle, given that the swimmer is a specialist in breaststroke.

....................................................[1]

© UCLES 2015 4040/12/O/N/15 [Turn over


14

(ii) The diagram below shows the number of track athletes who enter one or more of the events
100 metres, 200 metres and 400 metres.

    

PHWUHV PHWUHV PHWUHV

Use this information to find the number of these track athletes who enter

(a) only the 200 metres,

....................................................[1]

(b) the 100 metres,

....................................................[1]

(c) the 100 metres or the 400 metres,

....................................................[1]

(d) the 100 metres and the 400 metres.

....................................................[1]

(iii) One of the swimmers in part (i) and one of the track athletes in part (ii) are chosen at random
to undergo blood tests.

Find the probability that the swimmer is a specialist in freestyle and the track athlete enters
more than one of the given events.

....................................................[4]

© UCLES 2015 4040/12/O/N/15


15

(iv) Later, one of the track athletes in part (ii), who currently enters both the 100 metres and the
200 metres, decides to enter also the 400 metres.

Draw and label a new Venn diagram to represent the track athletes in part (ii) after this change
has been made.

[2]

© UCLES 2015 4040/12/O/N/15 [Turn over


16

10 A postman wears a pedometer, with which he measures the daily distance he walks when
delivering mail. The following table summarises the data he collected over 50 working days.

Daily distance Number


walked, x (km) of days, f
0 – under 3 7

3 – under 6 10

6 – under 9 15

9 – under 12 11

12 – under 15 5

15 – under 20 2

(i) State the modal class.

....................................................[1]

(ii) Estimate, in kilometres, the mean and standard deviation of the daily distance walked. Give
your answers correct to 3 significant figures.

Mean = .......................................................

Standard deviation = ...................................................[7]

(iii) State the units in which the variance of the daily distance walked would be measured.

....................................................[1]

(iv) From the data in the table, possible values for the range, r, are given by a ⬍ r ⬍ b.
Find a and b.

a = .......................................................

b = ...................................................[2]

© UCLES 2015 4040/12/O/N/15


17

Later the postman has to deliver mail to a new apartment building. The mail boxes are inside the
building, and to gain access he must enter a four-digit security code on a keypad outside the
building.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

The postman has forgotten the exact code, but he remembers, correctly, that the first digit is 4, and
the other digits are odd numbers which are different from each other. He uses this knowledge, but
otherwise randomly guesses.

Find the probability that he enters the correct code

(v) on the first attempt,

....................................................[3]

(vi) on the second attempt.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2015 4040/12/O/N/15 [Turn over


18

11 In this question calculate all mortality rates as deaths per thousand admissions. Where
values do not work out exactly give your answers to two decimal places.

At Northshore hospital, the medical condition of patients admitted is recorded as one of


non-urgent, stable, serious, or extremely serious. The table below gives information on the number
of admissions and mortality (number of deaths) at the hospital for the year 2014, together with the
standard population of admissions for hospitals in the area.

Medical Standard
Medical condition Mortality Admissions condition population of
mortality rate admissions (%)
Non-urgent 6 4000 15

Stable 35 5600 25

Serious 680 8500 40

Extremely serious 961 6200 20

(i) Calculate the crude mortality rate for Northshore hospital.

....................................................[4]

(ii) Calculate the mortality rate for each medical condition and insert the values in the table
above.

[2]

(iii) Calculate the standardised mortality rate for Northshore hospital.

....................................................[4]

© UCLES 2015 4040/12/O/N/15


19

The table below gives mortality rate information about Southshore hospital, which is situated in
the same area as Northshore hospital, also for the year 2014.

Medical condition mortality rate


Medical condition Admissions
(deaths per thousand admissions)

Non-urgent 1.4 5000

Stable 6.25 6400

Serious 85 7800

Extremely serious 162 5500

(iv) Calculate the standardised mortality rate for Southshore hospital in the year 2014, using the
same standard population as for Northshore hospital.

....................................................[2]

(v) Find how many fewer deaths there were at Southshore hospital than at Northshore hospital in
2014.

....................................................[2]

The local government of the area where Northshore and Southshore hospitals are situated has
sufficient funds available to improve medical care in one of the hospitals only.

(vi) State, with a reason, to which of these two hospitals the funds should be allocated.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2015 4040/12/O/N/15


20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2015 4040/12/O/N/15


CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
Cambridge Ordinary Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2015 series

4040 STATISTICS
4040/12 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 100

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.


Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2015 4040 12

MARK SCHEME NOTES

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark
schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method marks, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. For
accuracy marks to be given, the associated Method mark must be earned or implied.

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of Method marks.

When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are in principle independent
unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly where there are several B marks
allocated. The notation ‘dep’ is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an
earlier, asterisked, mark in the scheme.

The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from
previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A and B marks are given for correct work only.

Abbreviations

AG answer given on question paper


awrt answer which rounds to
cao correct answer only
dep dependent
ft follow through after error
oe or equivalent
SC special case
soi seen or implied
www without wrong working

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015


Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2015 4040 12

1 (i) systematic B1

(ii) quota B1

(iii) stratified B1

2 (i) mean or mode B1

(ii) median B1

(iii) standard deviation OR variance OR range B1

(iv) interquartile range B1


correct method for Q1 and Q3 (cf = 8, Q1 = 2; cf = 24, Q3 = 5) M1
3 A1

3 (i) one two-way table M1


with rows/columns headed M, F and columns/rows headed T, C, X A1
cell values 2, 5, 1 3, 7, 2 in correct places, totals not required A2
allow A1 for four or five correct

(ii) from these data, for males no, for females yes B1
but sample too small for general conclusion B1

4 (i) (a) B B1

(b) C B1

(c) C B1

(ii) 12 × mean for any shop M1


sum of three such products (41.04, 56.04, 45) M1
142 A1

5 (i) any four from 1, 5, 7, 11, 13, 14, 16, 17 for first four numbers written down
allow B1 for three correct B2

(ii) for 4, 4, 4 (1/6) × (1/6) × (1/6) (=1/216) B1


for 6, 6, not6 (1/6) × (1/6) × (5/6) B1
× 3 (= 15/216) B1
addition of all cases for 4, 4, 4 and 6, 6, not6 M1
16/216 oe (2/27, 0.0741) A1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015


Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2015 4040 12

6 (i) cumulative frequency polygon B1

(ii) 2.8 (hours) B1

(iii) attempt to read length of stay corresponding to cf = 102 M1


6.5 – 6.6 (hours) A1

(iv) correct method for numbers in paying categories


(88 – 48 or 112–88 or 120–112, 40 or 24 or 8) M1

correct payment in a paying category


(88–48) × 6 or (112–88) × 9 or (120–112) × 12
(40 × 6 or 24 × 9 or 8 × 12)
and total of numbers in two adjacent categories is 64 or 32 A1

correct method for total payment (at least one correct product)
(240 + 216 + 96) M1

$552 A1

7 (i) correct method for overall mean M1


overall mean (12.5, 60.3) A1
correct method for LSA or USA M1
LSA (5, 77.7) A1
USA (20, 43) A1

(ii) correct method for gradient M1


correct method for c M1
m = –2.306 to –2.320 and c = 89.1 to 89.4 A1

(iii) use of x = 30 in their equation M1


20 °C A1
ft only if gradient negative and answer is less than 38°

(iv) correctly plotted points B2


allow B1 for five correct

(v) straight line with negative gradient, for t = 0 to t = 30 M1


correct line joining (0, 89) and (30, 20)
OR line joining (0, their c) and (30, their 20) A1

(vi) relationship between the variables is not linear B1

(vii) will be higher than that calculated B1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015


Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2015 4040 12

8 (i) 748 B1

(ii) (525/1614) × 100 AG B1

(iii) ((53 + 60 + 51 + 39)/1614) × 100 M1


awrt 12.6(%) A1

(iv) indication of area being proportional to class frequency M1

rectangles
width 2 height 33 A1
width 3 height 24 A1
width 5 height 12 A1

(v) (90/360) × 144 M1


36 A1

(vi) finds (80/360) × 144 (= 32) M1*


(their 32/525) × 100 M1dep
awrt 6.10(%) or awrt 6.1(%) A1

(vii) finds (70/360) × 144 × 0.5 (= 14) M1*


(their 14/their 203) × 100 M1dep
6.90(%) or 6.9(%) A1

9 (i) (a) 11 B1

(b) 6 B1

(c) 4 B1

(d) 2 B1

(e) 8/30 oe B1

(f) 6/14 oe B1

(ii) (a) 4 B1

(b) 9 B1

(c) 16 B1

(d) 0 B1

(iii) for the swimmer 17/30 B1


for the track athlete 8/20 B1
multiplication of their swimmer and track athlete probabilities not multiplied by 2 M1
(provided at least one B1 earned)
17/75 oe A1

(iv) any Venn diagram with a triple intersection of 1 and double intersections of 5, 2, 0 M1
fully correct and annotated diagram A1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015


Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2015 4040 12

10 (i) 6 – under 9 B1

(ii) attempted use of class mid-points (1.5 4.5 7.5 10.5 13.5 17.5) M1*
correct method for mean (Σfx = 386) M1dep
7.72 A1
finding values of f × variable squared M1
correct method for SD or variance (Σfx2 = 3798.5, Σfx2 / Σf = 75.97) M1dep
4.04 to 4.05 A1
4.05 A1

(iii) km2 B1

(iv) 12 B1
20 B1

(v) (1) × (1/5) × p × q M1


(1) × (1/5) × (1/4) × (1/3) A1
1/60 oe (0.0167) A1

(vi) (1 – their 1/60) × their 1/60 M1


59/3600 oe (0.0164) A1

11 (i) 6 + 35 + 680 + 961 (= 1682) M1


4000 + 5600 + 8500 + 6200 (= 24300) M1
(their 1682/their 24300) × 1000 M1
69.22 A1

(ii) correct method for any medical condition M1


1.5 6.25 80 155 A1

(iii) any one medical condition rate multiplied by standard population figure M1
sum of four such products M1
(1.5 × 0.15) + (6.25 × 0.25) + (80 × 0.40) + (155 × 0.20) oe A1
64.79 or 64.7875 A1

(iv) (1.4 × 0.15) + (6.25 × 0.25) + (85 × 0.40) + (162 × 0.20) oe M1


68.17 or 68.1725 A1

(v) correct method for deaths at Southshore


(1.4 × 5) + (6.25 × 6.4) + (85 × 7.8) + (162 × 5.5) (=1601) M1
81 (ft only on their 1682) A1

(vi) because it has the higher standardised mortality rate


OR because mortality rates are higher for groups most at risk M1
Southshore A1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015


Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge Ordinary Level
* 6 7 7 4 9 0 6 7 3 4 *

STATISTICS 4040/13
Paper 1 October/November 2015
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
Additional Materials: Pair of compasses
Protractor

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions in Section A and not more than four questions from Section B.
If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
The use of an electronic calculator is expected in this paper.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

DC (ST/FD) 100434/3
© UCLES 2015 [Turn over
2

Section A [36 marks]

Answer all of the questions 1 to 6.

1 A teacher gives her pupils a test consisting of 5 questions, in which each question is worth 1 mark.
The test scores of the pupils are shown in the following chart.

8
6
Number
4
of pupils
2

0
0 1 2 3 4 5
Test score

(i) State the number of pupils whose test score is 1 mark.

....................................................[1]

(ii) Find the number of pupils taking the test.

....................................................[2]

(iii) State the modal test score.

....................................................[1]

(iv) Find the median test score.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2015 4040/13/O/N/15


3

2 A bird protection society is concerned by the declining numbers of certain birds, particularly
blackbirds and sparrows. To monitor the situation, members of the public were asked to count the
number of birds in their gardens during a 1-hour period last Sunday.

Andy took part in the survey and altogether he counted 212 birds. His results are shown in the pie
chart below, which has a radius of 3 cm.

Blackbird

Other

Sparrow

(i) Measure the angle for blackbirds. Give your answer correct to the nearest degree.

....................................................[1]

(ii) Calculate the number of blackbirds that Andy saw.

....................................................[2]

Katrina also took part in the survey and counted 137 birds in total.
She wants to show this information in a comparative pie chart.

(iii) Calculate the radius of Katrina’s pie chart, correct to 2 decimal places.

....................................................[2]

Katrina saw the same number of sparrows as Andy.

(iv) Explain why the angle for sparrows on Katrina’s pie chart will be larger than the angle for
sparrows on Andy’s pie chart. You are not required to find either of these angles.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2015 4040/13/O/N/15 [Turn over


4

3 Rishi and Rakhi are conducting a survey about the meals at the school canteen. They decide to
interview pupils aged 12, 13 and 14.
The table below shows the number of pupils of each age.

Age Number of pupils


12 60
13 63
14 52
TOTAL 175

Rather than asking all the pupils they decide to take a sample.

(i) Explain how they should select a systematic sample of size 25.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[3]

Alternatively, they could take a stratified sample of size 25.

(ii) If they choose this method, calculate the number of pupils aged 14 that would be interviewed.

....................................................[2]

After discussion they each conduct their own survey independently. They both take a systematic
sample of size 25. When they compare their results, Rishi notices that he has interviewed one
more student aged 12 than Rakhi has.

(iii) Explain why this is possible.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2015 4040/13/O/N/15


5

4 Students at a local college have the option of taking a 1-year vocational Computing course. At the
end of the course the students achieve either a PASS or a FAIL.
Information about the numbers taking the course is shown in the table below.

Number of students taking


Number of PASSES Total number of
Year the Computing course
students
Boys Girls Boys Girls
2010 41 52 36 38 470
2011 48 53 39 40 463
2012 56 49 46 42 501
2013 62 50 57 45 492

(i) State the number of girls who took the Computing course in 2012.

....................................................[1]

(ii) Of the boys who took the Computing course in 2010, calculate the percentage who achieved
a PASS.

....................................................[2]

(iii) Of all the students at the college in 2013, calculate the percentage who took the Computing
course and achieved a PASS.

....................................................[2]

(iv) Identify one trend in the number of students taking the Computing course from 2010 to 2013.

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2015 4040/13/O/N/15 [Turn over


6

5 A bag contains 10 counters, of which 3 are red. Basil selects counters from the bag one at a time,
at random, without replacement. He stops if he selects a red counter or if he has selected a total of
4 counters.

Let X be the number of counters selected.

(i) Find P(X = 1).

....................................................[1]

(ii) Show that P(X = 2) = 7/30.

[2]

(iii) Complete the following table:

x 1 2 3 4

Probability 7/30

[3]

© UCLES 2015 4040/13/O/N/15


7

6 A child’s toy consists of a box of coloured pieces. Each piece is green or blue, a square or a
triangle, and made of wood or plastic.

(i) Write down a variable of the pieces which is

(a) qualitative,

....................................................[1]

(b) quantitative and discrete,

....................................................[1]

(c) quantitative and continuous.

....................................................[1]

The diagram below shows the number of pieces which have one or more of the properties square,
made of wood, and green.

Square 15 3 12 Made of wood

2
7 9

30

Green

(ii) Find the number of pieces which are

(a) green and made of wood,

....................................................[1]

(b) squares which are made of plastic,

....................................................[1]

(c) green plastic triangles.

....................................................[1]

© UCLES 2015 4040/13/O/N/15 [Turn over


8

Section B [64 marks]

Answer not more than four of the questions 7 to 11.

Each question in this section carries 16 marks.

7 (a) Gary drives to work every day. On his journey he has to pass through two sets of traffic lights.
The probability that he has to stop at the first set of traffic lights is 0.62 . The probability that
he has to stop at the second set is 0.45 . These events are independent.

Find the probability that on any particular journey to work he has to stop at at least one set of
traffic lights.

....................................................[3]

(b) Alex and Beatrice play a series of games. In each game they throw, alternately, a dart at a
dart board. The first player to hit the bull’s-eye (centre) wins the game. They play a number of
games until one of them wins the series by winning three games.

In any game, if Alex throws first the probability that he wins the game is 0.64 . If Beatrice
throws first the probability that she wins the game is 0.78 .

To decide who starts the first game in the series an unbiased coin is tossed. Subsequent
games in the series are started by the winner of the previous game.

Find the probability that

(i) Beatrice wins the toss and wins the first game,

....................................................[2]

(ii) Alex wins the toss and Beatrice wins the first game,

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2015 4040/13/O/N/15


9

(iii) Alex wins the first game,

....................................................[2]

(iv) Beatrice wins the series by three games to zero.

....................................................[2]

They start a new series. Beatrice wins the first game and Alex wins the second game.

(v) Find the probability that Beatrice wins the series.

....................................................[5]

© UCLES 2015 4040/13/O/N/15 [Turn over


10

8 Konrad is conducting an experiment. He attaches a spring to a stand, then attaches a mass to the
bottom of the spring, and then measures the length of the spring. He repeats this experiment for
eight different masses. His results are shown in the table below.

Mass, x (g) 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
Length of spring, y (cm) 26.1 27.7 34.5 38.5 40.8 44.1 48.2 49.7

(i) Plot these data on the grid below.

70

60

50

Length of
40
spring (cm)

30

20

[
30 40 50 60 70 80
Mass (g)
[2]

© UCLES 2015 4040/13/O/N/15


11

The overall mean is (47.5, 38.7).

(ii) Calculate the lower semi-average and the upper semi-average.

........................................................

....................................................[3]

(iii) Plot these three averages on your graph and hence draw the line of best fit. [2]

(iv) Calculate the equation of the line of best fit in the form y = mx + c.

....................................................[4]

(v) State what the value of c represents.

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

(vi) Estimate the length of the spring for a mass of

(a) 42 g,

....................................................[1]

(b) 75 g.

....................................................[1]

(vii) Which of your estimates in part (vi) is likely to be more reliable? Give a reason for your
answer.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2015 4040/13/O/N/15 [Turn over


12

9 140 people applied to be contestants in a quiz show. As part of the selection process they were
given 60 seconds to solve a set of simple puzzles. The times taken by those who completed the
puzzles are summarised in the cumulative frequency graph below.

140

120

100

80
Cumulative
frequency
(people)
60

40

20

0
30 40 50 60
Completion time (seconds)

(i) State the number of people who failed to complete the puzzles within the allotted time.

....................................................[1]

© UCLES 2015 4040/13/O/N/15


13

(ii) Find, for all 140 people,

(a) the median completion time,

....................................................[1]

(b) the interquartile range of the completion times,

....................................................[4]

(c) the completion time of the quickest person.

....................................................[1]

The people were graded for speed. Those who took less than 40 seconds were graded A.
Those who took 40 seconds or more, but less than 49 seconds, were graded B. Those who took
49 seconds or more were graded C.

(iii) Find the number of people who were graded

(a) A,

....................................................[2]

(b) B.

....................................................[2]

(iv) Find the percentile of the quickest grade C person.

....................................................[2]

The people who completed the puzzles within the allotted time were also graded A, B or C for
accuracy. The table shows the cumulative percentages of these people graded A, B or C.

Grade for accuracy A A or B A or B or C


Percentage 15 75 100

(v) Find the maximum number of people that could have been graded B for both speed and
accuracy.

....................................................[3]
© UCLES 2015 4040/13/O/N/15 [Turn over
14

10 Dirota is a keen gardener. She likes to grow tomatoes in her greenhouse. She sows a packet
of seeds in a tray of compost and after five weeks she measures the heights of the plants. The
results are summarised in the histogram below.

20

16

Number of 12
plants per
1 cm of
plant height 8

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Plant height (cm)

(i) Find an estimate for the mode of the heights.

....................................................[2]

(ii) Estimate the number of plants which are

(a) more than 6.5 cm in height,

....................................................[2]

(b) more than 5 cm in height.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2015 4040/13/O/N/15


15

Each plant is transferred to its own pot. Dirota puts the plants in order of size, starting with the
shortest, and numbers the pots. The pot which contains the shortest plant is numbered 1; the pot
with the second shortest plant is numbered 2 etc.

(iii) Estimate the height of the plant in pot number 30.

....................................................[3]

After 8 weeks she has 60 surviving plants. She measures the height, x cm, of each of the plants
and finds that Σx = 443 and Σx 2 = 3489.

(iv) Calculate the mean and standard deviation of x.

Mean .......................................................

Standard deviation ...................................................[5]

Dirota sees an advertisement for a new plant food, which adds 2 cm to plant growth during the first
8 weeks after sowing.

(v) Write down what the mean and standard deviation of the heights of Dirota’s plants would
have been after 8 weeks if she had used this new plant food.

Mean .......................................................

Standard deviation ...................................................[2]

© UCLES 2015 4040/13/O/N/15 [Turn over


16

11 The table below gives information about the population and deaths in the town of Ashville for the
year 2012, together with the standard population of the area in which Ashville is situated.

Number of Population in Standard


Age group
deaths age group population (%)
0 – under 25 a 3500 21
25 – under 45 12 b 29
45 – under 65 27 5400 35
65 and over 15 2000 c

(i) The death rate for the 0 – under 25 age group was 6 per thousand. Show that a = 21.

[1]

(ii) The death rate for the 25 – under 45 age group was 2.5 per thousand. Find the value of b.

....................................................[2]

(iii) Calculate the death rates per thousand for the other two age groups.

45 – under 65 group .......................................................

65 and over group ...................................................[2]

(iv) Calculate the crude death rate per thousand for Ashville, correct to 2 decimal places.

....................................................[4]

(v) Write down the value of c.

....................................................[1]

© UCLES 2015 4040/13/O/N/15


17

(vi) Calculate the standardised death rate per thousand for Ashville.

....................................................[4]

Birchville is a town in the same area as Ashville. For Birchville, the crude death rate is 5.21 per
thousand and the standardised death rate is 3.44 per thousand.

(vii) State, with a reason, which of the two towns appears to have the healthier environment.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2015 4040/13/O/N/15


18

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2015 4040/13/O/N/15


19

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2015 4040/13/O/N/15


20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2015 4040/13/O/N/15


CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
Cambridge Ordinary Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2015 series

4040 STATISTICS
4040/13 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 100

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.


Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2015 4040 13

MARK SCHEME NOTES

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark
schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method marks, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. For
accuracy marks to be given, the associated Method mark must be earned or implied.

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of Method marks.

When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are in principle independent
unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly where there are several B marks
allocated. The notation ‘dep’ is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an
earlier, asterisked, mark in the scheme.

The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from
previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A and B marks are given for correct work only.

Abbreviations

AG answer given on question paper


awrt answer which rounds to
cao correct answer only
dep dependent
ft follow through after error
oe or equivalent
SC special case
soi seen or implied
www without wrong working

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015


Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2015 4040 13

1 (i) 5 B1

(ii) 4 + 5+ 6 + 6 + 7 + 3 M1
31 A1

(iii) 4 B1

(iv) identifies their 16th student M1


3 A1

2 (i) 100° ± 2° B1

(ii) “100”/360 × 212 (= 58.88888888 … ) M1


59 A1

(iii) √(137/212) × 3 M1
2.41 cm A1

(iv) larger as a proportion B1

3 (i) ordered list/register B1


175/25 = 7 → every 7th B1
random start in range 1–7 B1

(ii) 52/175 × 25 ( = 7.42857 … ) M1


7 A1

(iii) depends on where they start OR


60 not a multiple of 7 OR
differently ordered lists B1

4 (i) 49 B1

(ii) 36/41 × 100 M1


87.8 (%) A1

(iii) (57 + 45)/492 M1


20.7 (%) A1

(iv) boys increasing OR


girls constant OR
overall increase B1

5 (i) 0.3 B1

(ii) 7/10 B1
× 3/9 B1

(iii) 7/10 × 6/9 × 3/8 M1


7/40 A1
7/24 OR 1 – (7/30 + their P(1) + their P(3)) calculated B1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015


Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2015 4040 13

6 (i) (a) colour/shape/material etc. B1

(b) e.g. number of sides etc. B1

(c) mass/length of side/area etc. B1

(ii) (a) 11 B1

(b) 22 B1

(c) 30 B1

7 (a) product of correct pair of probabilities


for SS, SG, GS or GG (stop stop, stop go etc.) M1
1 – GG or SS + SG + GS M1
0.791 A1

(b) (i) 0.5 × 0.78 M1


0.39 A1

(ii) 0.5 × (1 – 0.64) M1


0.18 A1

(iii) 1 – (0.39 + 0.18) M1


0.43 A1

(iv) (1 – “0.43”) × (0.78)2 M1


0.347 A1

(v) 0.36 × 0.78 (= 0.2808) M1


0.36 × 0.22 × 0.36 (= 0.028512) M1
0.64 × 0.36 × 0.78 (= 0.179712) M1
addition M1
0.489 A1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015


Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2015 4040 13

8 (i) 8 points correct B2


(B1 for 6 or 7 correct)

(ii) any correct method for either semi-average M1


(37.5, 31.7) A1
(57.5, 45.7) A1

(iii) all 3 correctly plotted (ft their semi-averages) B1


straight line through at least two of their plotted averages B1

(iv) correct ratio using two of the averages or two points on their line M1
m = 0.7 A1
substitution M1
c = 5.45 A1

(v) original length of spring B1

(vi) (a) 35 cm B1

(b) 58 cm B1
(ft their line or equation, ± 0.5 if using line)

(vii) Because 75 g is outside the range of the data M1


the reading at 42 g is likely to be more reliable A1

9 (i) 10 B1

(ii) (a) 47 s B1

(b) reading from cf of 35 (= 44 s) B1


reading from cf of 105 (= 51 s) B1
“51” – “44” (provided at least one B1 earned) M1
7s A1

(c) 33 s–33.5 s B1

(iii) (a) reading from time of 40 s M1


18 A1

(b) reading from time of 49 s (= 88) – “18” M1


70 A1

(iv) 89/140 × 100 M1


64th A1

(v) 60/100 × 130 M1


78 A1
So max. is 70 (ft their (iii) (b) and “78”) B1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015


Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2015 4040 13

10 (i) correct use of cross-over M1


3 A1

(ii) (a) 2.5 × 2 M1


5 A1
(b) 1.5 × 6 + “5” M1
14 A1

(iii) 8/27 × 1.5 (= 0.444 …) M1


+ 2.5 M1
2.94 cm A1

(iv) 443/60 M1
7.38 A1
3489/60 – (443/60)2 (= 3.6363888888…) M1*
√ M1dep
1.91 A1

(v) 9.38 (ft their mean) B1


1.91 (ft their sd) B1

11 (i) 21/3500 × 1000 = 6 B1

(ii) 12/b × 1000 = 2.5 M1


4800 A1

(iii) 5 B1
7.5 B1

(iv) 75 (21 + 12 + 27 + 15) M1


15700 (3500 + 4800 + 5400 + 2000) M1
“75”/“15 700” × 1000 M1
4.78 A1

(v) 15 B1

(vi) Any correct product of death rate and standard pop M1


Sum of 4 such products M1
(6 × 0.21) + (2.5 × 0.29) + (5 × 0.35) + (7.5 × 0.15) ft A1
4.86 A1

(vii) Because it has a lower SDR M1


Birchville A1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015


Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge Ordinary Level
* 1 7 4 0 4 5 9 0 9 0 *

STATISTICS 4040/12
Paper 1 October/November 2016
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
Additional Materials: Pair of compasses
Protractor

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions in Section A and not more than four questions from Section B.
If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
The use of an electronic calculator is expected in this paper.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.

DC (KN/CGW) 117163/1
© UCLES 2016 [Turn over
2

Section A [36 marks]

Answer all of the questions 1 to 6.

1 The main sources of energy in the human diet are carbohydrates, proteins and fats. A nutritionist
recommends the following percentages from each of these sources.

Source Percentage of total energy


Carbohydrates 55%
Proteins 15%
Fats 30%

This information is to be illustrated in a pie chart of radius 4 cm.

(i) Calculate, in degrees, the angle of each sector.

Carbohydrates ..................................................... °

Proteins ..................................................... °

Fats ..................................................... °
[2]

(ii) Draw and label the pie chart.

[2]

© UCLES 2016 4040/12/O/N/16


3

2 Flights from an airport have either a domestic or an international destination. For each scheduled
departure the flight is categorised as on time, delayed or cancelled.
On one particular day there were 50 scheduled departures, of which 3 were cancelled, and 4 were
delayed domestic flights, as shown in the following table.

Flight departure
Destination TOTAL
On time Delayed Cancelled

Domestic 4

International

TOTAL 3 50

No domestic flights were cancelled.

(i) Use this information to insert two numbers into the table. [1]

Twice as many international flights as domestic flights were delayed.

(ii) Use this information to insert three more numbers into the table. [2]

80% of the scheduled departures were international flights.

(iii) Use this information to complete the table. [3]

© UCLES 2016 4040/12/O/N/16 [Turn over


4

3 The atmospheric pressure in a town at mid-day was measured every day for one week. The
following results, in millibars (mb), were obtained.

1012 1004 996 993 999 1000 1010

(i) Using an assumed mean of 1000 mb and showing your working, find the mean and standard
deviation of these values.

Mean = .......................................................

Standard deviation = ...................................................[4]

It is known that, on a mountain near the town, the atmospheric pressure is usually about 80 mb
lower than it is in the town.

(ii) Write down estimates for the mean and range of the atmospheric pressure on the mountain
at mid-day for this week.

Mean = .......................................................

Range = ...................................................[2]

© UCLES 2016 4040/12/O/N/16


5

4 The diagram below shows the number of stores in a shopping mall that sell clothes for one or
more of men, women and children.

Men

11 1
8

7 3
5
Women Children

Use this information to find the number of stores that sell clothes for

(i) children,

....................................................[1]

(ii) men and women,

....................................................[1]

(iii) women or children or both.

....................................................[2]

Later, two of the stores that sell clothes for men and women but not children start selling clothes
for children also.

Find, after this change, the number of stores that now sell clothes for

(iv) men and women only,

....................................................[1]

(v) men and children.

....................................................[1]

© UCLES 2016 4040/12/O/N/16 [Turn over


6

5 On an examination paper there are four questions, numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Candidates are
instructed to answer any three questions, but not more than three.
At the examination board the computer print-out shows the following information for the questions
answered by candidates from a particular school.

Questions answered
1, 2 and 3 1, 2 and 4 1, 3 and 4 2, 3 and 4 1, 2, 3 and 4
Number of
18 23 15 28 3
candidates

For checking the marking, a manager at the board selects the answer paper from one of these
candidates at random.

Find the probability that the candidate

(i) had not followed the examination instructions,

....................................................[1]

(ii) had answered Question 3,

....................................................[1]

(iii) had answered Question 2, given that the candidate had followed the examination instructions.

....................................................[1]

If, instead of selecting one, the manager selects two answer papers at random,

(iv) find the probability that one candidate had, and one candidate had not, followed the
examination instructions.

....................................................[3]

© UCLES 2016 4040/12/O/N/16


7

6 Rong and Shui survey the passengers on one journey along a particular bus route.
Rong records the number of passengers boarding, and alighting from, the bus at each point along
the route. Her raw data is as follows.

+27 +4 +14 +7 +2
Start A B C D E F G H I J Finish
–1 –5 –5 –4 –9 –30

For example, at the start of the journey 27 passengers boarded the empty bus, and at stop C,
4 passengers boarded the bus and 1 passenger alighted from the bus.

Assuming that each passenger boarded and alighted from the bus once only, find, for this journey,

(i) the number of passengers who travelled on the route,

....................................................[2]

(ii) the least and greatest number of passengers travelling on the bus between stops at any one
time.

Least = .......................................................

Greatest = ...................................................[3]

Shui asks a sample of the passengers to rate their opinions of bus services on the route, on each
of the aspects punctuality, cost, and comfort, on a scale from 0 (very poor) to 4 (very good). From
the ratings he calculates the measures shown in the table below.

Aspect Mean Standard deviation


Punctuality 1.0 0.63
Cost 2.0 1.41
Comfort 2.8 0.75

(iii) State, for which one of the aspects punctuality, cost, or comfort, passengers are generally

(a) most satisfied,

....................................................[1]

(b) least in agreement,

....................................................[1]

(c) least satisfied and most in agreement.

....................................................[1]

© UCLES 2016 4040/12/O/N/16 [Turn over


8

Section B [64 marks]

Answer not more than four of the questions 7 to 11.

Each question in this section carries 16 marks.

7 In this question calculate all pass rates as percentages, that is, as the number of passes
per 100 enrolments.

At Yarvard University, the academic ability of students enrolled, based on school performance, is
recorded as one of excellent, very good, good or moderate.
The table below gives information on the number of enrolments and number of passes in
Economics at the University, together with the standard population of enrolments for universities in
the area.

Standard
Number of Number of Ability group
Ability group population of
passes enrolments pass rate
enrolments (%)
Excellent 48 48 20
Very good 68 80 35
Good 20 32 30
Moderate 11 20 15

(i) Show that the crude pass rate for this course, correct to 1 decimal place, is 81.7%.

[3]

(ii) Calculate the pass rate for each ability group and insert the values in the table above.

[2]
© UCLES 2016 4040/12/O/N/16
9

(iii) Calculate the standardised pass rate for this course at Yarvard University.

....................................................[4]

The table below gives information on the pass rate, over the same period of time, for students of
Economics at Hale University, which is situated in the same area as Yarvard University.

Ability group Ability group pass rate Number of enrolments


Excellent 100.0 45
Very good 83.3 78
Good 65.9 44
Moderate 60.6 33

Calculate, for this course at Hale University,

(iv) the crude pass rate,

....................................................[3]

(v) the standardised pass rate, using the same standard population as for Yarvard University.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2016 4040/12/O/N/16 [Turn over


10

(vi) State, with a reason, which of the two universities appears to provide the higher quality
teaching in Economics.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2016 4040/12/O/N/16


11

BLANK PAGE

[Turn over for Question 8]

© UCLES 2016 4040/12/O/N/16 [Turn over


12

8 Tariq lives in a hill village but works in a fuel station on the main road below the village. He walks
down the hill from home to work in the morning, and walks back up the hill from work to home in
the evening.
The following table summarises his daily walking time from home to work over 60 working days.

Daily walking
Number
time from home
of days
to work (minutes)
16 – under 18 5
18 – under 20 14
20 – under 22 19
22 – under 24 15
24 – under 28 7

(i) Estimate, in minutes, the mean and standard deviation of these walking times. Give your
answers to 3 significant figures.

Mean = .......................................................

Standard deviation = ...................................................[7]

© UCLES 2016 4040/12/O/N/16


13

The following histogram summarises Tariq’s daily walking time from work to home for the same
60 days.

20

15

Number of
days per
10
2 minutes

0
20 25 30 35 40 45
Walking time from work to home
(minutes)

(ii) Use the histogram to complete the following table.

Daily walking time from


Number of days
work to home (minutes)
24 – under 28
28 – under 30
30 – under 32
32 – under 35
35 – under 40
[5]

(iii) Estimate the total time Tariq takes, on average, walking to and from work each day. Give your
answer to the nearest minute.

....................................................[4]

© UCLES 2016 4040/12/O/N/16 [Turn over


14

9 The following table summarises the daily water consumption of a family over a period of 80 days.

Water consumption (litres) Number of days Cumulative frequency


200 – under 250 4
250 – under 300 11
300 – under 350 20
350 – under 400 25
400 – under 450 14
450 – under 500 6

(i) Complete the cumulative frequency column in the table. [1]

(ii) Plot the cumulative frequencies on the grid opposite, joining the points by a smooth curve. [3]

(iii) Use the graph to estimate, for the daily water consumption,

(a) the median,

....................................................[1]

(b) the interquartile range,

....................................................[4]

(c) the value of p, if the pth percentile is 375 litres.

....................................................[2]

(iv) Use your answer to part (iii)(c) to find the probability that, on any one day, the water
consumption is more than 375 litres.

....................................................[1]

© UCLES 2016 4040/12/O/N/16


15

80

70

60

50

Cumulative
frequency 40
(days)

30

20

10

0
0 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Daily water consumption (litres)

The water company charges $2.50 per cubic metre for water consumed, plus an additional service
charge of $0.25 per day.

Assuming that the mean and median daily water consumption are approximately the same, and
given that 1000 litres = 1 cubic metre,

(v) estimate the total amount owed by the family to the water company for these 80 days.

....................................................[4]
© UCLES 2016 4040/12/O/N/16 [Turn over
16

10 The numbers of visitors staying in a particular town for leisure and business, in the years 2014 and
2015, are shown in the pictograms below.

Leisure
2014
Business

Leisure
2015
Business

= 2500 leisure visitors = 2500 business visitors

(i) State the number of visitors who stayed in the town for business in 2014.

....................................................[1]

(ii) How many more visitors stayed in the town for leisure than business in 2015?

....................................................[2]

(iii) Calculate the percentage increase, from 2014 to 2015, in the number of visitors who stayed in
the town for leisure.

....................................................[2]

The town’s tourist office provides the following information on hotels in the town.

Hotel Facilities

Royal P

Mountain View P

Palm Beach P

Commercial P

Panorama

Central

Key
P Car park Lift Wheelchair access
Swimming pool Free internet access Regular entertainment

© UCLES 2016 4040/12/O/N/16


17

(iv) If a visitor staying in the town chooses one of these hotels at random, find the probability that
the hotel

(a) has a lift and wheelchair access,

....................................................[1]

(b) has a car park or free internet access but not both,

....................................................[1]

(c) does not have a swimming pool, given that it does not provide regular entertainment.

....................................................[1]

The tourist office estimates that 30% of all visitors staying in the town for business choose The
Commercial Hotel, and that the remainder are equally likely to choose one of the other five hotels.

(v) Estimate the decrease, from 2014 to 2015, in the number of visitors staying in the town for
business who chose The Palm Beach Hotel.

....................................................[3]

(vi) A saleswoman comes to stay in the town to make new business contacts.

Estimate the probability that she chooses a hotel with wheelchair access.

....................................................[2]

(vii) Three visitors (who were old classmates, but now work for different companies) come to stay
in the town for a business conference.

Assuming they make choices independently of each other, estimate the probability that they
all choose the same hotel, and it has a lift.

....................................................[3]

© UCLES 2016 4040/12/O/N/16 [Turn over


18

11 Alfred has smoked cigarettes for many years. He decides to try to stop by reducing his consumption
gradually. His daughter Violet (a Statistics student) helps him by recording the number of cigarettes
he smokes each week. Her results are shown in the following table.

Week number, x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Number of
108 95 98 83 67 72 57 52
cigarettes smoked, y

(i) Plot these data on the grid below.

120

100

80

Number of
cigarettes 60
smoked

40

20

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 x
Week number

[2]

© UCLES 2016 4040/12/O/N/16


19

The data have an overall mean of (4.5, 79) and a lower semi-average of (2.5, 96).

(ii) Find the upper semi-average, and plot this and the two given averages on your graph.

[3]

(iii) Use your plotted averages to draw a line of best fit, and find its equation in the form
y = mx + c.

....................................................[4]

(iv) Use the equation you have found in part (iii) to predict the additional number of weeks after
which Alfred will have stopped smoking.

....................................................[2]

(v) Give a statistical reason why the prediction made in part (iv) might be unreliable.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

[Question 11 continues on the next page]

© UCLES 2016 4040/12/O/N/16 [Turn over


20

Alfred persuaded his friends George and Joseph, also cigarette smokers, to try to stop smoking,
at the same time and using the same method as himself.
The equations Violet found for their lines of best fit were

y = –7.9x + 131.5 for George


and y = –9.1x + 124.75 for Joseph.

(vi) Use this information, together with your answer to part (iii), to state, explaining your answers
briefly, which one of Alfred, George and Joseph

(a) originally smoked most cigarettes,

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

(b) was making the fastest progress towards stopping smoking.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2016 4040/12/O/N/16


Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge Ordinary Level

STATISTICS 4040/12
Paper 1 October/November 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2016 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

This document consists of 8 printed pages.

© UCLES 2016 [Turn over


Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2016 4040 12

MARK SCHEME NOTES

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark
schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method marks, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. For
accuracy marks to be given, the associated Method mark must be earned or implied.

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of Method marks.

When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are in principle independent
unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly where there are several B marks
allocated. The notation ‘dep’ is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an
earlier, asterisked, mark in the scheme.

The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from
previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A and B marks are given for correct work only.

Abbreviations

AG answer given on question paper


awrt answer which rounds to
cao correct answer only
dep dependent
ft follow through after error
oe or equivalent
SC special case
soi seen or implied
www without wrong working

© UCLES 2016
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2016 4040 12

1 (i) carbohydrates 198° proteins 54° fats 108°


(allow B1 for one correct) B2

(ii) chart of radius 4 cm (±1 mm) with three sectors labelled B1

their sector angles correct (±2°) with correct labels B1

[4]

2 (i) 0, 3 in correct place B1

(ii) 8, 12 in correct place B1

35 in correct place B1

(iii) 40 in correct place B1

10, 29 or 10, 6 in correct place B1

fully correct table B1

[6]

3 (i) correct method for mean of d values


(d = 12, 4, –4, –7, –1, 0, 10 Σd = 14) M1

mean = 1002 A1

correct method for SD or variance of d values


(Σd2 = 326) M1

SD = 6.52 or 6.52 … A1

(ii) mean = their 1002 – 80 (= 922) B1

range = 19 B1

[6]

4 (i) 17 B1

(ii) 19 B1

(iii) correct method (e.g. 11 + 7 + 8 + 5 + 1 + 3) M1

35 A1

(iv) 9 B1

(v) 11 B1

[6]

© UCLES 2016
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2016 4040 12

5 (i) 3/87 or 1/29 B1

(ii) 64/87 B1

(iii) 69/84 or 23/28 B1

(iv) (84/87) × (3/86) M1

×2 M1

504/7482 or 252/3741 or 84/1247 A1

[6]

6 (i) indication of appropriate method


by finding total of passengers boarding or alighting
(e.g. 27 + 4 + 14 + 7 + 2) M1

54 A1

(ii) indication of appropriate method


by finding numbers travelling between stops
(27, 27, 30, 25, 34, 34, 37, 39, 30)
implied by one correct answer M1

25 A1

39 A1

(iii) (a) comfort B1

(b) cost B1

(c) punctuality B1

[8]

7 (i) 48 + 68 + 20 + 11 (=147) M1

48 + 80 + 32 + 20 (=180) M1

correct expression seen leading to given answer


(147/180) × 100 A1

81.7% AG

(ii) correct method for very good, good or moderate group M1

100 85 62.5 55 A1

© UCLES 2016
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2016 4040 12

(iii) any one of very good, good or moderate group rate


multiplied by standard population figure M1

sum of four such products M1

(100 × 0.20) + (85 × 0.35) + (62.5 × 0.30) + (55 × 0.15) A1

76.75% or 76.8% A1

(iv) (45 × 1) + (78 × 0.833) + (44 × 0.659) + (33 × 0.606) (=159) M1

((their 159)/(45 + 78 + 44 + 33)) × 100 (=159/2) M1

79.5% A1

(v) (100 × 0.20) + (83.3 × 0.35) + (65.9 × 0.30) + (60.6 × 0.15) M1

78.0% A1

(vi) higher standardised pass rate/


achieves greater success with less able students M1

Hale A1

[16]

8 (i) attempted use of class mid-points (17, 19, 21, 23, 26) M1*

correct method for mean (Σfx = 1277) M1dep

21 or 21.2 or 21.3 or 21.28 ... A1

finding values of f × variable squared (e.g. 1445, 5054 ...) M1

correct method for SD or variance (Σfx2 = 27545) M1dep

2.5 or 2.47 – 2.50 A1

21.3 and 2.47 A1

(ii) 8, 17 in correct place B1

any indication of column area being proportional to frequency


implied by any one correct answer for three non-standard width classes M1

4, 21, 10 A3

© UCLES 2016
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2016 4040 12

(iii) their4 × 26 + their8 × 29 + their17 × 31 + their21 × 33.5 + their10 × 37.5 (=1941.5) M1

their 1277 + their 1941.5 (=3218.5) M1

their 3218.5/60 with Σf = 60 from (ii) M1

54
ft only on their 1277 A1

[16]

9 (i) 4, 15, 35, 60, 74, 80 B1

(ii) horizontal plots at UCBs B1

their vertical plots at cfs M1

suitable curve A1

(iii) (a) 355 – 362.5 (litres) B1

(b) Q1 find consumption for cf = 20 (312 – 317 (litres)) M1

Q3 find consumption for cf = 60 (400 (litres)) M1

use of IQR = Q3 – Q1
with at least one of Q1, Q3 found properly from their curve M1

83 – 88 (litres) A1

(c) attempt to find cf at 375 litres (48) as a percentage of 80 M1

58.75 – 61.25 A1

(iv) 1 – (their (iii)(c))/100) B1

(v) their median × 80 (360 × 80 = 28800) M1

their 28800/1000 (=28.8) M1

(their 28.8 × $2.50) + (80 × $0.25) M1

$92 A1

[16]

10 (i) 15 000 B1

(ii) 15 × 2500 – 5 × 2500 M1

25 000 A1

© UCLES 2016
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2016 4040 12

(iii) [(15 × 2500 – 13 × 2500)/(13 × 2500)] × 100 oe M1

15% or 15.4% or 15.38 ...% A1

(iv) (a) 3/6 B1

(b) 3/6 B1

(c) 3/5 B1

(v) find decrease


for total 15000 – 12500 (=2500) or
for Com 0.3 × (15000 – 12500) (=4500 – 3750 = 750) or
for others 0.7 × (15000 – 12500) (=10500 – 8750 = 1750) M1

find appropriate fraction


2500 × 0.14 or (2500 – 750) × 0.2 or 1750 × 0.2 M1

350 A1

(vi) 0.3 (× 1) + 0.7 × (4/5) M1

0.86 A1

(vii) (0.3)3 (× 1) B1

+ (0.14)3 × 2 M1

0.032 or 0.0325 or 0.0324 ... A1

[16]

11 (i) correctly plotted points


(allow B1 for 6 or 7 correct) B2

(ii) correct method for USA M1

(6.5, 62) plotted correctly A1

(4.5, 79) and (2.5, 96) plotted correctly B1

(iii) line through at least two of their plotted averages B1

correct method for gradient M1

correct method for c M1

m = –8.60 to –8.40 and c = 116 to 118 A1

(iv) setting y = 0 in their equation, solving for x (and subtracting 8) M1

6 (accept decimal answer 5.8) A1

© UCLES 2016
Page 8 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2016 4040 12

(v) (substantial) extrapolation beyond range of data/


relationship established may change/
relationship may become non linear
(do not accept references to relapsing alone) B1

(vi) (a) any indication that c only is determining factor M1

George: highest c, highest y at the start where x=0


ft conclusion from their equation for Alfred A1

(b) any indication that m only is determining factor M1

Joseph: magnitude of m is largest, steepest negative gradient


ft conclusion from their equation for Alfred A1

[16]

© UCLES 2016
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge Ordinary Level
* 3 2 7 0 8 2 2 8 9 3 *

STATISTICS 4040/13
Paper 1 October/November 2016
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
Additional Materials: Pair of compasses
Protractor

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions in Section A and not more than four questions from Section B.
If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
The use of an electronic calculator is expected in this paper.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.

DC (CW/CGW) 134135/1
© UCLES 2016 [Turn over
2

Section A [36 marks]

Answer all of the questions 1 to 6.

1 The main sources of energy in the human diet are carbohydrates, proteins and fats. A nutritionist
recommends the following percentages from each of these sources.

Source Percentage of total energy


Carbohydrates 55%
Proteins 15%
Fats 30%

This information is to be illustrated in a pie chart of radius 4 cm.

(i) Calculate, in degrees, the angle of each sector.

Carbohydrates ..................................................... °

Proteins ..................................................... °

Fats ..................................................... °
[2]

(ii) Draw and label the pie chart.

[2]

© UCLES 2016 4040/13/O/N/16


3

2 Flights from an airport have either a domestic or an international destination. For each scheduled
departure the flight is categorised as on time, delayed or cancelled.
On one particular day there were 50 scheduled departures, of which 3 were cancelled, and 4 were
delayed domestic flights, as shown in the following table.

Flight departure
Destination TOTAL
On time Delayed Cancelled

Domestic 4

International

TOTAL 3 50

No domestic flights were cancelled.

(i) Use this information to insert two numbers into the table. [1]

Twice as many international flights as domestic flights were delayed.

(ii) Use this information to insert three more numbers into the table. [2]

80% of the scheduled departures were international flights.

(iii) Use this information to complete the table. [3]

© UCLES 2016 4040/13/O/N/16 [Turn over


4

3 The atmospheric pressure in a town at mid-day was measured every day for one week. The
following results, in millibars (mb), were obtained.

1012 1004 996 993 999 1000 1010

(i) Using an assumed mean of 1000 mb and showing your working, find the mean and standard
deviation of these values.

Mean = .......................................................

Standard deviation = ...................................................[4]

It is known that, on a mountain near the town, the atmospheric pressure is usually about 80 mb
lower than it is in the town.

(ii) Write down estimates for the mean and range of the atmospheric pressure on the mountain
at mid-day for this week.

Mean = .......................................................

Range = ...................................................[2]

© UCLES 2016 4040/13/O/N/16


5

4 The diagram below shows the number of stores in a shopping mall that sell clothes for one or
more of men, women and children.

Men

11 1
8

7 3
5
Women Children

Use this information to find the number of stores that sell clothes for

(i) children,

....................................................[1]

(ii) men and women,

....................................................[1]

(iii) women or children or both.

....................................................[2]

Later, two of the stores that sell clothes for men and women but not children start selling clothes
for children also.

Find, after this change, the number of stores that now sell clothes for

(iv) men and women only,

....................................................[1]

(v) men and children.

....................................................[1]

© UCLES 2016 4040/13/O/N/16 [Turn over


6

5 On an examination paper there are four questions, numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Candidates are
instructed to answer any three questions, but not more than three.
At the examination board the computer print-out shows the following information for the questions
answered by candidates from a particular school.

Questions answered
1, 2 and 3 1, 2 and 4 1, 3 and 4 2, 3 and 4 1, 2, 3 and 4
Number of
18 23 15 28 3
candidates

For checking the marking, a manager at the board selects the answer paper from one of these
candidates at random.

Find the probability that the candidate

(i) had not followed the examination instructions,

....................................................[1]

(ii) had answered Question 3,

....................................................[1]

(iii) had answered Question 2, given that the candidate had followed the examination instructions.

....................................................[1]

If, instead of selecting one, the manager selects two answer papers at random,

(iv) find the probability that one candidate had, and one candidate had not, followed the
examination instructions.

....................................................[3]

© UCLES 2016 4040/13/O/N/16


7

6 Rong and Shui survey the passengers on one journey along a particular bus route.
Rong records the number of passengers boarding, and alighting from, the bus at each point along
the route. Her raw data is as follows.

+27 +4 +14 +7 +2
Start A B C D E F G H I J Finish
–1 –5 –5 –4 –9 –30

For example, at the start of the journey 27 passengers boarded the empty bus, and at stop C,
4 passengers boarded the bus and 1 passenger alighted from the bus.

Assuming that each passenger boarded and alighted from the bus once only, find, for this journey,

(i) the number of passengers who travelled on the route,

....................................................[2]

(ii) the least and greatest number of passengers travelling on the bus between stops at any one
time.

Least = .......................................................

Greatest = ...................................................[3]

Shui asks a sample of the passengers to rate their opinions of bus services on the route, on each
of the aspects punctuality, cost, and comfort, on a scale from 0 (very poor) to 4 (very good). From
the ratings he calculates the measures shown in the table below.

Aspect Mean Standard deviation


Punctuality 1.0 0.63
Cost 2.0 1.41
Comfort 2.8 0.75

(iii) State, for which one of the aspects punctuality, cost, or comfort, passengers are generally

(a) most satisfied,

....................................................[1]

(b) least in agreement,

....................................................[1]

(c) least satisfied and most in agreement.

....................................................[1]

© UCLES 2016 4040/13/O/N/16 [Turn over


8

Section B [64 marks]

Answer not more than four of the questions 7 to 11.

Each question in this section carries 16 marks.

7 In this question calculate all pass rates as percentages, that is, as the number of passes
per 100 enrolments.

At Yarvard University, the academic ability of students enrolled, based on school performance, is
recorded as one of excellent, very good, good or moderate.
The table below gives information on the number of enrolments and number of passes in
Economics at the University, together with the standard population of enrolments for universities in
the area.

Standard
Number of Number of Ability group
Ability group population of
passes enrolments pass rate
enrolments (%)
Excellent 48 48 20
Very good 68 80 35
Good 20 32 30
Moderate 11 20 15

(i) Show that the crude pass rate for this course, correct to 1 decimal place, is 81.7%.

[3]

(ii) Calculate the pass rate for each ability group and insert the values in the table above.

[2]
© UCLES 2016 4040/13/O/N/16
9

(iii) Calculate the standardised pass rate for this course at Yarvard University.

....................................................[4]

The table below gives information on the pass rate, over the same period of time, for students of
Economics at Hale University, which is situated in the same area as Yarvard University.

Ability group Ability group pass rate Number of enrolments


Excellent 100.0 45
Very good 83.3 78
Good 65.9 44
Moderate 60.6 33

Calculate, for this course at Hale University,

(iv) the crude pass rate,

....................................................[3]

(v) the standardised pass rate, using the same standard population as for Yarvard University.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2016 4040/13/O/N/16 [Turn over


10

(vi) State, with a reason, which of the two universities appears to provide the higher quality
teaching in Economics.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2016 4040/13/O/N/16


11

BLANK PAGE

[Turn over for Question 8]

© UCLES 2016 4040/13/O/N/16 [Turn over


12

8 Tariq lives in a hill village but works in a fuel station on the main road below the village. He walks
down the hill from home to work in the morning, and walks back up the hill from work to home in
the evening.
The following table summarises his daily walking time from home to work over 60 working days.

Daily walking
Number
time from home
of days
to work (minutes)
16 – under 18 5
18 – under 20 14
20 – under 22 19
22 – under 24 15
24 – under 28 7

(i) Estimate, in minutes, the mean and standard deviation of these walking times. Give your
answers to 3 significant figures.

Mean = .......................................................

Standard deviation = ...................................................[7]

© UCLES 2016 4040/13/O/N/16


13

The following histogram summarises Tariq’s daily walking time from work to home for the same
60 days.

20

15

Number of
days per
10
2 minutes

0
20 25 30 35 40 45
Walking time from work to home
(minutes)

(ii) Use the histogram to complete the following table.

Daily walking time from


Number of days
work to home (minutes)
24 – under 28
28 – under 30
30 – under 32
32 – under 35
35 – under 40
[5]

(iii) Estimate the total time Tariq takes, on average, walking to and from work each day. Give your
answer to the nearest minute.

....................................................[4]

© UCLES 2016 4040/13/O/N/16 [Turn over


14

9 The following table summarises the daily water consumption of a family over a period of 80 days.

Water consumption (litres) Number of days Cumulative frequency


200 – under 250 4
250 – under 300 11
300 – under 350 20
350 – under 400 25
400 – under 450 14
450 – under 500 6

(i) Complete the cumulative frequency column in the table. [1]

(ii) Plot the cumulative frequencies on the grid opposite, joining the points by a smooth curve. [3]

(iii) Use the graph to estimate, for the daily water consumption,

(a) the median,

....................................................[1]

(b) the interquartile range,

....................................................[4]

(c) the value of p, if the pth percentile is 375 litres.

....................................................[2]

(iv) Use your answer to part (iii)(c) to find the probability that, on any one day, the water
consumption is more than 375 litres.

....................................................[1]

© UCLES 2016 4040/13/O/N/16


15

80

70

60

50

Cumulative
frequency 40
(days)

30

20

10

0
0 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Daily water consumption (litres)

The water company charges $2.50 per cubic metre for water consumed, plus an additional service
charge of $0.25 per day.

Assuming that the mean and median daily water consumption are approximately the same, and
given that 1000 litres = 1 cubic metre,

(v) estimate the total amount owed by the family to the water company for these 80 days.

....................................................[4]
© UCLES 2016 4040/13/O/N/16 [Turn over
16

10 The numbers of visitors staying in a particular town for leisure and business, in the years 2014 and
2015, are shown in the pictograms below.

Leisure
2014
Business

Leisure
2015
Business

= 2500 leisure visitors = 2500 business visitors

(i) State the number of visitors who stayed in the town for business in 2014.

....................................................[1]

(ii) How many more visitors stayed in the town for leisure than business in 2015?

....................................................[2]

(iii) Calculate the percentage increase, from 2014 to 2015, in the number of visitors who stayed in
the town for leisure.

....................................................[2]

The town’s tourist office provides the following information on hotels in the town.

Hotel Facilities

Royal P

Mountain View P

Palm Beach P

Commercial P

Panorama

Central

Key
P Car park Lift Wheelchair access
Swimming pool Free internet access Regular entertainment

© UCLES 2016 4040/13/O/N/16


17

(iv) If a visitor staying in the town chooses one of these hotels at random, find the probability that
the hotel

(a) has a lift and wheelchair access,

....................................................[1]

(b) has a car park or free internet access but not both,

....................................................[1]

(c) does not have a swimming pool, given that it does not provide regular entertainment.

....................................................[1]

The tourist office estimates that 30% of all visitors staying in the town for business choose The
Commercial Hotel, and that the remainder are equally likely to choose one of the other five hotels.

(v) Estimate the decrease, from 2014 to 2015, in the number of visitors staying in the town for
business who chose The Palm Beach Hotel.

....................................................[3]

(vi) A saleswoman comes to stay in the town to make new business contacts.

Estimate the probability that she chooses a hotel with wheelchair access.

....................................................[2]

(vii) Three visitors (who were old classmates, but now work for different companies) come to stay
in the town for a business conference.

Assuming they make choices independently of each other, estimate the probability that they
all choose the same hotel, and it has a lift.

....................................................[3]

© UCLES 2016 4040/13/O/N/16 [Turn over


18

11 Alfred has smoked cigarettes for many years. He decides to try to stop by reducing his consumption
gradually. His daughter Violet (a Statistics student) helps him by recording the number of cigarettes
he smokes each week. Her results are shown in the following table.

Week number, x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Number of
108 95 98 83 67 72 57 52
cigarettes smoked, y

(i) Plot these data on the grid below.

120

100

80

Number of
cigarettes 60
smoked

40

20

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 x
Week number

[2]

© UCLES 2016 4040/13/O/N/16


19

The data have an overall mean of (4.5, 79) and a lower semi-average of (2.5, 96).

(ii) Find the upper semi-average, and plot this and the two given averages on your graph.

[3]

(iii) Use your plotted averages to draw a line of best fit, and find its equation in the form
y = mx + c.

....................................................[4]

(iv) Use the equation you have found in part (iii) to predict the additional number of weeks after
which Alfred will have stopped smoking.

....................................................[2]

(v) Give a statistical reason why the prediction made in part (iv) might be unreliable.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

[Question 11 continues on the next page]

© UCLES 2016 4040/13/O/N/16 [Turn over


20

Alfred persuaded his friends George and Joseph, also cigarette smokers, to try to stop smoking,
at the same time and using the same method as himself.
The equations Violet found for their lines of best fit were

y = –7.9x + 131.5 for George


and y = –9.1x + 124.75 for Joseph.

(vi) Use this information, together with your answer to part (iii), to state, explaining your answers
briefly, which one of Alfred, George and Joseph

(a) originally smoked most cigarettes,

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

(b) was making the fastest progress towards stopping smoking.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2016 4040/13/O/N/16


Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge Ordinary Level

STATISTICS 4040/13
Paper 1 October/November 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2016 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

This document consists of 8 printed pages.

© UCLES 2016 [Turn over


Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2016 4040 13

MARK SCHEME NOTES

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark
schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method marks, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. For
accuracy marks to be given, the associated Method mark must be earned or implied.

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of Method marks.

When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are in principle independent
unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly where there are several B marks
allocated. The notation ‘dep’ is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an
earlier, asterisked, mark in the scheme.

The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from
previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A and B marks are given for correct work only.

Abbreviations

AG answer given on question paper


awrt answer which rounds to
cao correct answer only
dep dependent
ft follow through after error
oe or equivalent
SC special case
soi seen or implied
www without wrong working

© UCLES 2016
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2016 4040 13

1 (i) carbohydrates 198° proteins 54° fats 108°


(allow B1 for one correct) B2

(ii) chart of radius 4 cm (±1 mm) with three sectors labelled B1

their sector angles correct (±2°) with correct labels B1

[4]

2 (i) 0, 3 in correct place B1

(ii) 8, 12 in correct place B1

35 in correct place B1

(iii) 40 in correct place B1

10, 29 or 10, 6 in correct place B1

fully correct table B1

[6]

3 (i) correct method for mean of d values


(d = 12, 4, –4, –7, –1, 0, 10 Σd = 14) M1

mean = 1002 A1

correct method for SD or variance of d values


(Σd2 = 326) M1

SD = 6.52 or 6.52 … A1

(ii) mean = their 1002 – 80 (= 922) B1

range = 19 B1

[6]

4 (i) 17 B1

(ii) 19 B1

(iii) correct method (e.g. 11 + 7 + 8 + 5 + 1 + 3) M1

35 A1

(iv) 9 B1

(v) 11 B1

[6]

© UCLES 2016
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2016 4040 13

5 (i) 3/87 or 1/29 B1

(ii) 64/87 B1

(iii) 69/84 or 23/28 B1

(iv) (84/87) × (3/86) M1

×2 M1

504/7482 or 252/3741 or 84/1247 A1

[6]

6 (i) indication of appropriate method


by finding total of passengers boarding or alighting
(e.g. 27 + 4 + 14 + 7 + 2) M1

54 A1

(ii) indication of appropriate method


by finding numbers travelling between stops
(27, 27, 30, 25, 34, 34, 37, 39, 30)
implied by one correct answer M1

25 A1

39 A1

(iii) (a) comfort B1

(b) cost B1

(c) punctuality B1

[8]

7 (i) 48 + 68 + 20 + 11 (=147) M1

48 + 80 + 32 + 20 (=180) M1

correct expression seen leading to given answer


(147/180) × 100 A1

81.7% AG

(ii) correct method for very good, good or moderate group M1

100 85 62.5 55 A1

© UCLES 2016
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2016 4040 13

(iii) any one of very good, good or moderate group rate


multiplied by standard population figure M1

sum of four such products M1

(100 × 0.20) + (85 × 0.35) + (62.5 × 0.30) + (55 × 0.15) A1

76.75% or 76.8% A1

(iv) (45 × 1) + (78 × 0.833) + (44 × 0.659) + (33 × 0.606) (=159) M1

((their 159)/(45 + 78 + 44 + 33)) × 100 (=159/2) M1

79.5% A1

(v) (100 × 0.20) + (83.3 × 0.35) + (65.9 × 0.30) + (60.6 × 0.15) M1

78.0% A1

(vi) higher standardised pass rate/


achieves greater success with less able students M1

Hale A1

[16]

8 (i) attempted use of class mid-points (17, 19, 21, 23, 26) M1*

correct method for mean (Σfx = 1277) M1dep

21 or 21.2 or 21.3 or 21.28 ... A1

finding values of f × variable squared (e.g. 1445, 5054 ...) M1

correct method for SD or variance (Σfx2 = 27545) M1dep

2.5 or 2.47 – 2.50 A1

21.3 and 2.47 A1

(ii) 8, 17 in correct place B1

any indication of column area being proportional to frequency


implied by any one correct answer for three non-standard width classes M1

4, 21, 10 A3

© UCLES 2016
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2016 4040 13

(iii) their4 × 26 + their8 × 29 + their17 × 31 + their21 × 33.5 + their10 × 37.5 (=1941.5) M1

their 1277 + their 1941.5 (=3218.5) M1

their 3218.5/60 with Σf = 60 from (ii) M1

54
ft only on their 1277 A1

[16]

9 (i) 4, 15, 35, 60, 74, 80 B1

(ii) horizontal plots at UCBs B1

their vertical plots at cfs M1

suitable curve A1

(iii) (a) 355 – 362.5 (litres) B1

(b) Q1 find consumption for cf = 20 (312 – 317 (litres)) M1

Q3 find consumption for cf = 60 (400 (litres)) M1

use of IQR = Q3 – Q1
with at least one of Q1, Q3 found properly from their curve M1

83 – 88 (litres) A1

(c) attempt to find cf at 375 litres (48) as a percentage of 80 M1

58.75 – 61.25 A1

(iv) 1 – (their (iii)(c))/100) B1

(v) their median × 80 (360 × 80 = 28800) M1

their 28800/1000 (=28.8) M1

(their 28.8 × $2.50) + (80 × $0.25) M1

$92 A1

[16]

10 (i) 15 000 B1

(ii) 15 × 2500 – 5 × 2500 M1

25 000 A1

© UCLES 2016
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2016 4040 13

(iii) [(15 × 2500 – 13 × 2500)/(13 × 2500)] × 100 oe M1

15% or 15.4% or 15.38 ...% A1

(iv) (a) 3/6 B1

(b) 3/6 B1

(c) 3/5 B1

(v) find decrease


for total 15000 – 12500 (=2500) or
for Com 0.3 × (15000 – 12500) (=4500 – 3750 = 750) or
for others 0.7 × (15000 – 12500) (=10500 – 8750 = 1750) M1

find appropriate fraction


2500 × 0.14 or (2500 – 750) × 0.2 or 1750 × 0.2 M1

350 A1

(vi) 0.3 (× 1) + 0.7 × (4/5) M1

0.86 A1

(vii) (0.3)3 (× 1) B1

+ (0.14)3 × 2 M1

0.032 or 0.0325 or 0.0324 ... A1

[16]

11 (i) correctly plotted points


(allow B1 for 6 or 7 correct) B2

(ii) correct method for USA M1

(6.5, 62) plotted correctly A1

(4.5, 79) and (2.5, 96) plotted correctly B1

(iii) line through at least two of their plotted averages B1

correct method for gradient M1

correct method for c M1

m = –8.60 to –8.40 and c = 116 to 118 A1

(iv) setting y = 0 in their equation, solving for x (and subtracting 8) M1

6 (accept decimal answer 5.8) A1

© UCLES 2016
Page 8 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge O Level – October/November 2016 4040 13

(v) (substantial) extrapolation beyond range of data/


relationship established may change/
relationship may become non linear
(do not accept references to relapsing alone) B1

(vi) (a) any indication that c only is determining factor M1

George: highest c, highest y at the start where x=0


ft conclusion from their equation for Alfred A1

(b) any indication that m only is determining factor M1

Joseph: magnitude of m is largest, steepest negative gradient


ft conclusion from their equation for Alfred A1

[16]

© UCLES 2016
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge Ordinary Level
* 1 6 3 1 8 6 6 1 9 0 *

STATISTICS 4040/12
Paper 1 October/November 2017
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
Additional Materials: Pair of compasses
Protractor

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions in Section A and not more than four questions from Section B.
If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
The use of an electronic calculator is expected in this paper.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

DC (LK/AR) 135683/2
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
2

Section A [36 marks]

Answer all of the questions 1 to 6.

1 (a) State, for each of the following, the name of a method of sampling in which

(i) a sampling frame is never required,

....................................................[1]

(ii) every item in the population is numbered, and a random number table or generator is
used to select every item in the sample,

....................................................[1]

(iii) every item in the population is numbered, and a random number table or generator is
used to select only the first item in the sample.

....................................................[1]

(b) Consider the following statement, from which two statistical terms have been omitted.

‘When selecting a sample from a population, a researcher should, wherever possible, ensure

that the sampling method is free from ......................................... , and that the sample is

......................................... of the population.’

Insert the appropriate terms into the spaces to complete the statement. [1]

© UCLES 2017 4040/12/O/N/17


3

2 The maximum temperature each week in a town was recorded over a ten-week period.

(i) The following values, in °C, rounded to the nearest integer, were obtained.

23 24 22 26 28 23 28 32 29 28

For these values, find

(a) the median,

....................................................[2]

(b) the mode,

....................................................[1]

(c) the mean.

....................................................[2]

The temperatures in the town were originally recorded correct to one decimal place.

(ii) Using the original values, it might have been impossible to find one of the measures named in
part (i).

State which measure, explaining the reason for your choice.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2017 4040/12/O/N/17 [Turn over


4

3 A holiday company organises safari tours to African countries. The diagram below shows the
number of the company’s guides who have taken tours to one or more of the countries Tanzania,
Botswana and Kenya.

Tanzania

2 5
1

4 3 8

Botswana Kenya

Use this information to find the number of guides who have taken tours to

(i) Botswana,

....................................................[1]

(ii) Tanzania and Kenya but not Botswana,

....................................................[1]

(iii) Tanzania or Kenya or both.

....................................................[2]

All the guides who have taken tours to Botswana, but only these guides, have also taken tours to
Zimbabwe.

Of the four countries Tanzania, Botswana, Kenya and Zimbabwe, find the number of guides who
have taken tours to

(iv) exactly two countries,

....................................................[1]

(v) at least three countries.

....................................................[1]

© UCLES 2017 4040/12/O/N/17


5

4 A dental surgery is open for six days each week, and holds appointments each day in three
sessions: morning, afternoon, and evening.
The table below shows measures for the number of appointments held in each session during one
particular week.

Session Mean Standard deviation


Morning 6.33 0.745
Afternoon 5.33 2.810
Evening 2.50 1.260

(i) State, for which one of the sessions morning, afternoon or evening, the number of
appointments was generally

(a) largest,

....................................................[1]

(b) most varied.

....................................................[1]

(ii) Find the total number of appointments held in the surgery during this week.

....................................................[2]

Each afternoon session lasts 4 hours.

(iii) Assuming that appointments are held continuously throughout the session, estimate the
length of time of an afternoon appointment, on average, during this particular week. Give your
answer in minutes.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2017 4040/12/O/N/17 [Turn over


6

5 The table below summarises the performance of a hockey team for every match played in one
season. For each match there are two pieces of information: the number of goals scored and the
number of goals conceded.

Number of goals scored


0 1 2 3 4 5 or more
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 0 1 0 2
Number 2 0 0 1 0 3 0
of goals
conceded 3 0 1 1 4 2 2
4 0 0 2 1 0 0
5 or more 0 0 0 0 0 0

For example, there were three matches in which the team scored 4 goals and conceded 2 goals.

(i) Find the number of matches in which the team

(a) conceded exactly 3 goals,

....................................................[1]

(b) scored 4 goals or more,

....................................................[1]

(c) scored the same number of goals as it conceded.

....................................................[1]

(ii) Calculate the total number of goals conceded by the team in the season.

....................................................[2]

(iii) Explain why it is not possible to calculate, from the table above, the total number of goals
scored by the team in the season.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2017 4040/12/O/N/17


7

6 Candidates who enter for a proficiency certificate with an examining board must submit a long
essay, with specified minimum and maximum word limits, in their subject of study. From its
records, the board knows that, for any subject, 3% of the essays submitted are underlength, 5%
are overlength, and the remainder are of the specified length.

(i) A manager at the board selects at random an essay submitted in History and an essay
submitted in Sociology.

Find the probability that

(a) both essays are of the specified length,

....................................................[2]

(b) the essay in History is of the specified length, but the essay in Sociology is not,

....................................................[2]

(c) one of the essays is underlength and the other essay is overlength.

....................................................[2]

(ii) In one particular year, 134 candidates submitted an essay that was not of the specified length.

Find the total number of essays submitted in that year.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2017 4040/12/O/N/17 [Turn over


8

Section B [64 marks]

Answer not more than four of the questions 7 to 11.

Each question in this section carries 16 marks.

7 In this question all pass rates, whether given or to be found, are expressed, or are to be
expressed, as percentages.

At Lernalott School the academic ability of all enrolled A Level pupils, based on O Level
performance, is recorded as one of outstanding, very good, good or modest.
The table below gives information on the number of enrolments and the pass rate in A Level
Biology at the school, together with the standard population of enrolments for all A Level subjects
at the school.

Academic ability Number of Ability group Standard population


group enrolments pass rate (%) of enrolments (%)
Outstanding 6 100.0 20
Very good 8 87.5 40
Good 5 80.0 30
Modest 4 50.0 10

For A Level Biology, calculate

(i) the standardised pass rate,

....................................................[4]

(ii) the crude pass rate.

....................................................[5]

© UCLES 2017 4040/12/O/N/17


9

The table below gives information on pass rates, over the same period of time, for pupils in other
A Level subjects at Lernalott School.

Number of Standardised
Subject Crude pass rate (%)
enrolments pass rate (%)
Chemistry 28 84.7 85.7
Physics 18 75.0 72.2
Chinese 25 73.3 80.0
Japanese 12 88.0 66.7
English 17 65.0 76.5

(iii) State, with a reason, in which of these five subjects the highest quality of teaching appears to
have been provided.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

(iv) State in which of these five subjects the highest number of passes was obtained. Explain how
this can be known without further calculation.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

In publicity material the school gives crude pass rates for Arts, Sciences, Languages etc. (rather
than for individual subjects).

(v) Calculate the crude pass rate for the languages Chinese, Japanese and English combined.

....................................................[3]

© UCLES 2017 4040/12/O/N/17 [Turn over


10

8 The following table summarises the heights of the 25 tallest buildings in a city.

Building height Number of


(metres) buildings
80 – under 90 6
90 – under 95 3
95 – under 100 4
100 – under 120 7
120 – under 145 5

(i) Estimate the mean height of these buildings.

....................................................[3]

(ii) On the following grid, draw a histogram to illustrate the data in the table above. The rectangle
representing the 80 – under 90 class has already been drawn for you.

10

Number of 6
buildings
per
10 metres 4

0
70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
Building height (metres)
[4]

© UCLES 2017 4040/12/O/N/17


11

In the city a new building is being constructed which will have a height of 165 metres after
completion.

(iii) Estimate the new mean height of the 25 tallest buildings in the city after the completion of this
building.

....................................................[2]

One of the buildings has 20 floors (levels) of three different types: 4 floors have only shops,
9 floors have only offices, and the remainder have only apartments.

Three of the 20 floors are selected at random for routine safety checks.

Find the probability that

(iv) all three floors have apartments,

....................................................[2]

(v) two floors have shops and one floor has offices,

....................................................[3]

(vi) the floors are of different types.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2017 4040/12/O/N/17 [Turn over


12

9 A particular supermarket sells 64 different types of bread. The salt content of these types, in grams
per 100 grams of bread (g/100 g), is illustrated in the cumulative frequency curve below.

70

60

50

40
Cumulative
frequency
(types of
bread) 30

20

10

0
0 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
Salt content (g/100 g)

(i) Use the graph to estimate, for these types of bread,

(a) the median salt content,

...................................... g/100 g [1]

(b) the interquartile range of the salt content,

...................................... g/100 g [4]

(c) the value of p, if the pth percentile of the salt content is 1.35 g/100 g.

....................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 4040/12/O/N/17
13

For a healthy diet, the government recommends a maximum salt content for bread of 1.0 g/100 g.

(ii) Use the graph to estimate, for these types of bread,

(a) the number which meet the government’s recommendation,

....................................................[1]

(b) the median salt content of those which do not meet the government’s recommendation.

...................................... g/100 g [2]

A government food inspector, visiting this supermarket, selects four different types of bread at
random.

Find the probability that she finds

(iii) none which meet the government’s recommendation,

....................................................[3]

(iv) at least one which meets the government’s recommendation.

....................................................[2]

Later, the supermarket reduces the salt content of all types of bread by 0.05 g/100 g.

(v) State, explaining your answer, which of the measures found in part (i) will be unchanged. You
are not required to recalculate the measures.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2017 4040/12/O/N/17 [Turn over


14

10 Pedro is a market trader who displays no prices on the items he offers for sale. When a potential
customer shows interest in an item, Pedro states his asking price. Usually, following bargaining, if
he sells the item it will be for a different price. His daughter Manuela (a statistics student) observes
eight transactions her father makes, and in each case records the asking price and the actual
selling price. Her results are shown in the following table.

Item A B C D E F G H
Asking price, x ($) 15 35 40 75 10 65 60 25
Actual selling price, y ($) 12 20 40 55 8 45 35 20

(i) Plot these data on the grid below.

60

50

40

Actual
selling
30
price
($)

20

10

0 x
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Asking price ($)
[2]

© UCLES 2017 4040/12/O/N/17


15

The data have an overall mean of (40.625, 29.375) and an upper semi-average of (60, 43.75).

(ii) Find the lower semi-average, and plot this and the two given averages on your graph.

[3]

(iii) Use your plotted averages to draw a line of best fit, and find its equation in the form
y = mx + c .

....................................................[4]

(iv) Use your line to estimate, to the nearest $5, for other transactions,

(a) the actual selling price of an item with an asking price of $55,

....................................................[2]

(b) the asking price for an item which Pedro wishes to sell for $50.

....................................................[2]

Manuela observes from her line of best fit that, overall, Pedro’s actual selling price is
approximately k% less than the asking price.

(v) Use your answer to part (iii) to estimate the value of k.

....................................................[2]

(vi) State, with a reason, for which of the items A – H Pedro will be most satisfied with the business
transacted.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2017 4040/12/O/N/17 [Turn over


16

11 A restaurant manager surveys a sample of customers to find their opinions on a proposed ban on
the use of mobile phones in her restaurant. Results are shown in the pictogram below.

                
Males               
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

               
Females        
? ? ? ? ? ?

 = 1 person in favour of a ban  = 1 person against a ban ? = 1 person undecided

For this sample,

(i) state the total number of customers who were in favour of a ban,

....................................................[1]

(ii) state how many fewer females were against a ban than in favour of it,

....................................................[1]

(iii) calculate the percentage of all the customers who had a decided opinion on the ban.

....................................................[3]

The results shown in the pictogram are to be represented in comparative pie charts drawn to
scale; one for males and one for females. The chart for males has already been drawn for you on
the opposite page.

(iv) Draw, on the opposite page, the chart for females.

© UCLES 2017 4040/12/O/N/17


17

Opinions of Males on Proposed Ban Opinions of Females on Proposed Ban

Undecided

In favour

Against

[5]

(v) By comparing the pie charts, write down three conclusions that may be drawn from the survey.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................

3 ............................................................................................................................................[3]

(vi) For survey results, give one advantage of

(a) a pictogram presentation over a pie chart presentation,

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(b) a pie chart presentation over a pictogram presentation.

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

In conducting a survey, open or closed questions may be used.

(vii) State, for the restaurant manager’s survey, which of these types of question she seems to
have used. Explain your answer.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2017 4040/12/O/N/17


18

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2017 4040/12/O/N/17


19

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2017 4040/12/O/N/17


20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2017 4040/12/O/N/17


Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge Ordinary Level

STATISTICS 4040/12
Paper 1 October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2017 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

® IGCSE is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 8 printed pages.

© UCLES 2017 [Turn over


4040/12 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017

MARK SCHEME NOTES

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark
schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method marks, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. For
accuracy marks to be given, the associated Method mark must be earned or implied.

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of Method marks.

When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are in principle independent
unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly where there are several B marks
allocated. The notation ‘dep’ is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an
earlier, asterisked, mark in the scheme.

The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from
previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A and B marks are given for correct work only.

Abbreviations

AG answer given on question paper


awrt answer which rounds to
cao correct answer only
dep dependent
ft follow through after error
oe or equivalent
SC special case
soi seen or implied
www without wrong working

© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 8


4040/12 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

1(a)(i) quota 1 B1

1(a)(ii) [simple] random/stratified random 1 B1

1(a)(iii) systematic 1 B1

1(b) bias, representative 1 B1

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

2(i)(a) ordering of data 2 M1

27 A1

2(i)(b) 28 1 B1

2(i)(c) correct method 2 M1

26.3 A1

2(ii) mode: possibly no repeated value, e.g. original recordings for 1 B1


3 × 28 may have been 28.1, 27.8, 28.3 oe

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

3(i) 10 1 B1

3(ii) 5 1 B1

3(iii) appropriate method 2 M1

26 A1

3(iv) 9 1 B1

3(v) 6 1 B1

© UCLES 2017 Page 3 of 8


4040/12 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

4(i)(a) morning 1 B1

4(i)(b) afternoon 1 B1

4(ii) (6.33 + 5.33 + 2.50) × 6 2 M1

85 A1

4(iii) (4 × 60)/5.33 oe 2 M1

45 (minutes) A1

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

5(i)(a) 10 1 B1

5(i)(b) 9 1 B1

5(i)(c) 6 1 B1

5(ii) (5 × 1) + (4 × 2) + (10 × 3) + (3 × 4) 2 M1

55 A1

5(iii) in 4 matches, it is only known that 5 or more goals scored, 1 B1


so goals scored in these matches unknown

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

6(i)(a) (0.92)2 2 M1

0.8464 oe (529/625) A1

6(i)(b) 0.92 × 0.08 2 M1

0.0736 oe (46/625) A1

6(i)(c) 0.03 × 0.05 × 2 2 M1

0.003 oe (3/1000) A1

6(ii) 134/0.08 2 M1

1675 A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 4 of 8


4040/12 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

7(i) any one of very good, good or modest group rate multiplied 4 M1
by standard population figure

sum of four such products M1

(100 × 0.20) + (87.5 × 0.40) + (80 × 0.30) + (50 × 0.10) oe A1

84(%) A1

7(ii) total enrolments 6 + 8 + 5 + 4 (= 23) 5 M1


method for passes in any one of very good, good or modest
group

0.875 × 8 or 0.8 × 5 or 0.5 × 4 M1

(1 × 6) + (0.875 × 8) + (0.8 × 5) + (0.5 × 4) (= 19) M1

((their 19)/(their 23)) × 100 M1

82.6(%) A1

7(iii) Japanese 2 B1

SPR largest B1

7(iv) Chemistry 2 B1

CPR largest and largest number of enrolments B1

7(v) total languages passes found using CPR 3

(0.800 × 25) + (0.667 × 12) + (0.765 × 17) (= 41) M1*

((their 41)/(25 + 12 + 17)) × 100 M1dep

75.9(%) A1

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

8(i) attempted use of class mid-points 3

(85, 92.5, 97.5, 110, 132.5) M1*

correct method for mean (Σfx = 2610) M1dep

104.4 (m) A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 5 of 8


4040/12 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

8(ii) indication of area being proportional to class frequency 4 M1

3 or 4 correct heights drawn A2


(allow A1 for two correct)

fully correct histogram A1

8(iii) (their Σfx from (i)) + (165) – (1 × 85) oe (= 2690) 2 M1

107.6 (m) A1

8(iv) (7/20) × (6/19) × (5/18) 2 M1

7/228 oe (0.0307) A1

8(v) (4/20) × (3/19) × (9/18) 3 M1

×3 M1

9/190 oe (0.0474) A1

8(vi) (4/20) × (9/19) × (7/18) × 6 2 M1

21/95 oe (0.221) A1

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

9(i)(a) 1.16 1 B1

9(i)(b) Q1 find salt content for cf = 16 (1.07) 4 M1

Q3 find salt content for cf = 48 (1.24) M1

use of IQR = Q3 – Q1 M1

0.17 A1

9(i)(c) attempt to read cf for salt content 1.35 (= 60) 2 M1


and express as percentage of 64

awrt 94 A1

9(ii)(a) 8 1 B1

9(ii)(b) attempt to read salt content 2 M1


for cf = their 8 + 0.5 × (64 – their 8) (= 36)

1.18 A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 6 of 8


4040/12 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

9(iii) product of four decreasing fractions, 3 M1*


denominators 64, 63, 62, 61

first numerator 64 – their 8 M1dep

0.578 or 0.58 (8745/15128) A1

9(iv) 1 – their 0.578 2 M1

0.422 or 0.42 ft (6383/15128) A1

9(v) IQR 1 B1
dispersion unchanged by same change in all population
elements/Q1, Q3 both decrease by same amount so
difference unchanged.

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

10(i) correctly plotted points 2 B2


(allow B1 for 6 or 7 correctly plotted)

10(ii) method for calculating LSA 3 M1

plot of (21.25, 15) A1

plot of (40.625, 29.375) and (60, 43.75) B1

10(iii) straight line through at least two of their plotted points in (ii) 4 B1

correct method for gradient of their line M1

correct method for intercept of their line M1

m = 0.74 to 0.75 and c = 0 to – 1 inclusive A1

10(iv)(a) find y from equation or graph using x = 55 2 M1

$40 A1

10(iv)(b) find x from equation or graph using y = 50 2 M1

$70 A1

10(v) as c ≈ 0, LOBF is y ≈ 0.74x or y ≈ 74% of x 2 M1


or
use equation or line to find y for chosen value of x
and calculate ((x – y)/x) ¯100

25(%) – 30(%) A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 7 of 8


4040/12 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

10(vi) choice consistent with reason offered 1 B1


e.g. C because customer paid asking price/
graph shows plot to deviate most from LOBF on upper side

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

11(i) 33 1 B1

11(ii) 8 1 B1

11(iii) 17 + 15 + 16 + 8 (= 56) 3 M1

((their 56)/(their 56 + 8 + 6)) × 100 M1

80(%) A1

11(iv) use of r2 to find radius 5 M1

r = √[(30/40) × 3.52] M1

chart drawn with r = 2.9 cm to 3.1 cm A1

correct method of angle calculation M1

correct angles: in favour 192°, against 96°, undecided 72°, all A1


±2°, and chart complete with labelling

11(v) in favour: 3 B1
smaller proportion of males/greater proportion of females

against: B1
greater proportion of males/smaller proportion of females

undecided: B1
proportion of males and females same/approx same

11(vi)(a) clear visual representation of (relative) total/number(s) in 1 B1


categories

11(vi)(b) clear visual representation of relative proportions in 1 B1


categories

11(vii) closed 1 B1
apparently customers were restricted to only three possible
responses

© UCLES 2017 Page 8 of 8


Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge Ordinary Level
* 3 7 3 9 9 7 2 1 8 9 *

STATISTICS 4040/13
Paper 1 October/November 2017
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
Additional Materials: Pair of compasses
Protractor

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions in Section A and not more than four questions from Section B.
If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
The use of an electronic calculator is expected in this paper.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

DC (SC) 151779
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
2

Section A [36 marks]

Answer all of the questions 1 to 6.

1 (a) State, for each of the following, the name of a method of sampling in which

(i) a sampling frame is never required,

....................................................[1]

(ii) every item in the population is numbered, and a random number table or generator is
used to select every item in the sample,

....................................................[1]

(iii) every item in the population is numbered, and a random number table or generator is
used to select only the first item in the sample.

....................................................[1]

(b) Consider the following statement, from which two statistical terms have been omitted.

‘When selecting a sample from a population, a researcher should, wherever possible, ensure

that the sampling method is free from ......................................... , and that the sample is

......................................... of the population.’

Insert the appropriate terms into the spaces to complete the statement. [1]

© UCLES 2017 4040/13/O/N/17


3

2 The maximum temperature each week in a town was recorded over a ten-week period.

(i) The following values, in °C, rounded to the nearest integer, were obtained.

23 24 22 26 28 23 28 32 29 28

For these values, find

(a) the median,

....................................................[2]

(b) the mode,

....................................................[1]

(c) the mean.

....................................................[2]

The temperatures in the town were originally recorded correct to one decimal place.

(ii) Using the original values, it might have been impossible to find one of the measures named in
part (i).

State which measure, explaining the reason for your choice.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2017 4040/13/O/N/17 [Turn over


4

3 A holiday company organises safari tours to African countries. The diagram below shows the
number of the company’s guides who have taken tours to one or more of the countries Tanzania,
Botswana and Kenya.

Tanzania

2 5
1

4 3 8

Botswana Kenya

Use this information to find the number of guides who have taken tours to

(i) Botswana,

....................................................[1]

(ii) Tanzania and Kenya but not Botswana,

....................................................[1]

(iii) Tanzania or Kenya or both.

....................................................[2]

All the guides who have taken tours to Botswana, but only these guides, have also taken tours to
Zimbabwe.

Of the four countries Tanzania, Botswana, Kenya and Zimbabwe, find the number of guides who
have taken tours to

(iv) exactly two countries,

....................................................[1]

(v) at least three countries.

....................................................[1]

© UCLES 2017 4040/13/O/N/17


5

4 A dental surgery is open for six days each week, and holds appointments each day in three
sessions: morning, afternoon, and evening.
The table below shows measures for the number of appointments held in each session during one
particular week.

Session Mean Standard deviation


Morning 6.33 0.745
Afternoon 5.33 2.810
Evening 2.50 1.260

(i) State, for which one of the sessions morning, afternoon or evening, the number of
appointments was generally

(a) largest,

....................................................[1]

(b) most varied.

....................................................[1]

(ii) Find the total number of appointments held in the surgery during this week.

....................................................[2]

Each afternoon session lasts 4 hours.

(iii) Assuming that appointments are held continuously throughout the session, estimate the
length of time of an afternoon appointment, on average, during this particular week. Give your
answer in minutes.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2017 4040/13/O/N/17 [Turn over


6

5 The table below summarises the performance of a hockey team for every match played in one
season. For each match there are two pieces of information: the number of goals scored and the
number of goals conceded.

Number of goals scored


0 1 2 3 4 5 or more
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 0 1 0 2
Number 2 0 0 1 0 3 0
of goals
conceded 3 0 1 1 4 2 2
4 0 0 2 1 0 0
5 or more 0 0 0 0 0 0

For example, there were three matches in which the team scored 4 goals and conceded 2 goals.

(i) Find the number of matches in which the team

(a) conceded exactly 3 goals,

....................................................[1]

(b) scored 4 goals or more,

....................................................[1]

(c) scored the same number of goals as it conceded.

....................................................[1]

(ii) Calculate the total number of goals conceded by the team in the season.

....................................................[2]

(iii) Explain why it is not possible to calculate, from the table above, the total number of goals
scored by the team in the season.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2017 4040/13/O/N/17


7

6 Candidates who enter for a proficiency certificate with an examining board must submit a long
essay, with specified minimum and maximum word limits, in their subject of study. From its
records, the board knows that, for any subject, 3% of the essays submitted are underlength, 5%
are overlength, and the remainder are of the specified length.

(i) A manager at the board selects at random an essay submitted in History and an essay
submitted in Sociology.

Find the probability that

(a) both essays are of the specified length,

....................................................[2]

(b) the essay in History is of the specified length, but the essay in Sociology is not,

....................................................[2]

(c) one of the essays is underlength and the other essay is overlength.

....................................................[2]

(ii) In one particular year, 134 candidates submitted an essay that was not of the specified length.

Find the total number of essays submitted in that year.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2017 4040/13/O/N/17 [Turn over


8

Section B [64 marks]

Answer not more than four of the questions 7 to 11.

Each question in this section carries 16 marks.

7 In this question all pass rates, whether given or to be found, are expressed, or are to be
expressed, as percentages.

At Lernalott School the academic ability of all enrolled A Level pupils, based on O Level
performance, is recorded as one of outstanding, very good, good or modest.
The table below gives information on the number of enrolments and the pass rate in A Level
Biology at the school, together with the standard population of enrolments for all A Level subjects
at the school.

Academic ability Number of Ability group Standard population


group enrolments pass rate (%) of enrolments (%)
Outstanding 6 100.0 20
Very good 8 87.5 40
Good 5 80.0 30
Modest 4 50.0 10

For A Level Biology, calculate

(i) the standardised pass rate,

....................................................[4]

(ii) the crude pass rate.

....................................................[5]

© UCLES 2017 4040/13/O/N/17


9

The table below gives information on pass rates, over the same period of time, for pupils in other
A Level subjects at Lernalott School.

Number of Standardised
Subject Crude pass rate (%)
enrolments pass rate (%)
Chemistry 28 84.7 85.7
Physics 18 75.0 72.2
Chinese 25 73.3 80.0
Japanese 12 88.0 66.7
English 17 65.0 76.5

(iii) State, with a reason, in which of these five subjects the highest quality of teaching appears to
have been provided.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

(iv) State in which of these five subjects the highest number of passes was obtained. Explain how
this can be known without further calculation.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

In publicity material the school gives crude pass rates for Arts, Sciences, Languages etc. (rather
than for individual subjects).

(v) Calculate the crude pass rate for the languages Chinese, Japanese and English combined.

....................................................[3]

© UCLES 2017 4040/13/O/N/17 [Turn over


10

8 The following table summarises the heights of the 25 tallest buildings in a city.

Building height Number of


(metres) buildings
80 – under 90 6
90 – under 95 3
95 – under 100 4
100 – under 120 7
120 – under 145 5

(i) Estimate the mean height of these buildings.

....................................................[3]

(ii) On the following grid, draw a histogram to illustrate the data in the table above. The rectangle
representing the 80 – under 90 class has already been drawn for you.

10

Number of 6
buildings
per
10 metres 4

0
70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
Building height (metres)
[4]

© UCLES 2017 4040/13/O/N/17


11

In the city a new building is being constructed which will have a height of 165 metres after
completion.

(iii) Estimate the new mean height of the 25 tallest buildings in the city after the completion of this
building.

....................................................[2]

One of the buildings has 20 floors (levels) of three different types: 4 floors have only shops,
9 floors have only offices, and the remainder have only apartments.

Three of the 20 floors are selected at random for routine safety checks.

Find the probability that

(iv) all three floors have apartments,

....................................................[2]

(v) two floors have shops and one floor has offices,

....................................................[3]

(vi) the floors are of different types.

....................................................[2]

© UCLES 2017 4040/13/O/N/17 [Turn over


12

9 A particular supermarket sells 64 different types of bread. The salt content of these types, in grams
per 100 grams of bread (g/100 g), is illustrated in the cumulative frequency curve below.

70

60

50

40
Cumulative
frequency
(types of
bread) 30

20

10

0
0 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
Salt content (g/100 g)

(i) Use the graph to estimate, for these types of bread,

(a) the median salt content,

...................................... g/100 g [1]

(b) the interquartile range of the salt content,

...................................... g/100 g [4]

(c) the value of p, if the pth percentile of the salt content is 1.35 g/100 g.

....................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 4040/13/O/N/17
13

For a healthy diet, the government recommends a maximum salt content for bread of 1.0 g/100 g.

(ii) Use the graph to estimate, for these types of bread,

(a) the number which meet the government’s recommendation,

....................................................[1]

(b) the median salt content of those which do not meet the government’s recommendation.

...................................... g/100 g [2]

A government food inspector, visiting this supermarket, selects four different types of bread at
random.

Find the probability that she finds

(iii) none which meet the government’s recommendation,

....................................................[3]

(iv) at least one which meets the government’s recommendation.

....................................................[2]

Later, the supermarket reduces the salt content of all types of bread by 0.05 g/100 g.

(v) State, explaining your answer, which of the measures found in part (i) will be unchanged. You
are not required to recalculate the measures.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2017 4040/13/O/N/17 [Turn over


14

10 Pedro is a market trader who displays no prices on the items he offers for sale. When a potential
customer shows interest in an item, Pedro states his asking price. Usually, following bargaining, if
he sells the item it will be for a different price. His daughter Manuela (a statistics student) observes
eight transactions her father makes, and in each case records the asking price and the actual
selling price. Her results are shown in the following table.

Item A B C D E F G H
Asking price, x ($) 15 35 40 75 10 65 60 25
Actual selling price, y ($) 12 20 40 55 8 45 35 20

(i) Plot these data on the grid below.

60

50

40

Actual
selling
30
price
($)

20

10

0 x
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Asking price ($)
[2]

© UCLES 2017 4040/13/O/N/17


15

The data have an overall mean of (40.625, 29.375) and an upper semi-average of (60, 43.75).

(ii) Find the lower semi-average, and plot this and the two given averages on your graph.

[3]

(iii) Use your plotted averages to draw a line of best fit, and find its equation in the form
y = mx + c .

....................................................[4]

(iv) Use your line to estimate, to the nearest $5, for other transactions,

(a) the actual selling price of an item with an asking price of $55,

....................................................[2]

(b) the asking price for an item which Pedro wishes to sell for $50.

....................................................[2]

Manuela observes from her line of best fit that, overall, Pedro’s actual selling price is
approximately k% less than the asking price.

(v) Use your answer to part (iii) to estimate the value of k.

....................................................[2]

(vi) State, with a reason, for which of the items A – H Pedro will be most satisfied with the business
transacted.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2017 4040/13/O/N/17 [Turn over


16

11 A restaurant manager surveys a sample of customers to find their opinions on a proposed ban on
the use of mobile phones in her restaurant. Results are shown in the pictogram below.

                
Males               
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

               
Females        
? ? ? ? ? ?

 = 1 person in favour of a ban  = 1 person against a ban ? = 1 person undecided

For this sample,

(i) state the total number of customers who were in favour of a ban,

....................................................[1]

(ii) state how many fewer females were against a ban than in favour of it,

....................................................[1]

(iii) calculate the percentage of all the customers who had a decided opinion on the ban.

....................................................[3]

The results shown in the pictogram are to be represented in comparative pie charts drawn to
scale; one for males and one for females. The chart for males has already been drawn for you on
the opposite page.

(iv) Draw, on the opposite page, the chart for females.

© UCLES 2017 4040/13/O/N/17


17

Opinions of Males on Proposed Ban Opinions of Females on Proposed Ban

Undecided

In favour

Against

[5]

(v) By comparing the pie charts, write down three conclusions that may be drawn from the survey.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................

3 ............................................................................................................................................[3]

(vi) For survey results, give one advantage of

(a) a pictogram presentation over a pie chart presentation,

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(b) a pie chart presentation over a pictogram presentation.

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

In conducting a survey, open or closed questions may be used.

(vii) State, for the restaurant manager’s survey, which of these types of question she seems to
have used. Explain your answer.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2017 4040/13/O/N/17


18

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2017 4040/13/O/N/17


19

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2017 4040/13/O/N/17


20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2017 4040/13/O/N/17


Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge Ordinary Level

STATISTICS 4040/13
Paper 1 October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2017 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

® IGCSE is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 8 printed pages.

© UCLES 2017 [Turn over


4040/13 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017

MARK SCHEME NOTES

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark
schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method marks, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. For
accuracy marks to be given, the associated Method mark must be earned or implied.

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of Method marks.

When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are in principle independent
unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly where there are several B marks
allocated. The notation ‘dep’ is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an
earlier, asterisked, mark in the scheme.

The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from
previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A and B marks are given for correct work only.

Abbreviations

AG answer given on question paper


awrt answer which rounds to
cao correct answer only
dep dependent
ft follow through after error
oe or equivalent
SC special case
soi seen or implied
www without wrong working

© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 8


4040/13 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

1(a)(i) quota 1 B1

1(a)(ii) [simple] random/stratified random 1 B1

1(a)(iii) systematic 1 B1

1(b) bias, representative 1 B1

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

2(i)(a) ordering of data 2 M1

27 A1

2(i)(b) 28 1 B1

2(i)(c) correct method 2 M1

26.3 A1

2(ii) mode: possibly no repeated value, e.g. original recordings for 1 B1


3 × 28 may have been 28.1, 27.8, 28.3 oe

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

3(i) 10 1 B1

3(ii) 5 1 B1

3(iii) appropriate method 2 M1

26 A1

3(iv) 9 1 B1

3(v) 6 1 B1

© UCLES 2017 Page 3 of 8


4040/13 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

4(i)(a) morning 1 B1

4(i)(b) afternoon 1 B1

4(ii) (6.33 + 5.33 + 2.50) × 6 2 M1

85 A1

4(iii) (4 × 60)/5.33 oe 2 M1

45 (minutes) A1

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

5(i)(a) 10 1 B1

5(i)(b) 9 1 B1

5(i)(c) 6 1 B1

5(ii) (5 × 1) + (4 × 2) + (10 × 3) + (3 × 4) 2 M1

55 A1

5(iii) in 4 matches, it is only known that 5 or more goals scored, 1 B1


so goals scored in these matches unknown

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

6(i)(a) (0.92)2 2 M1

0.8464 oe (529/625) A1

6(i)(b) 0.92 × 0.08 2 M1

0.0736 oe (46/625) A1

6(i)(c) 0.03 × 0.05 × 2 2 M1

0.003 oe (3/1000) A1

6(ii) 134/0.08 2 M1

1675 A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 4 of 8


4040/13 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

7(i) any one of very good, good or modest group rate multiplied 4 M1
by standard population figure

sum of four such products M1

(100 × 0.20) + (87.5 × 0.40) + (80 × 0.30) + (50 × 0.10) oe A1

84(%) A1

7(ii) total enrolments 6 + 8 + 5 + 4 (= 23) 5 M1


method for passes in any one of very good, good or modest
group

0.875 × 8 or 0.8 × 5 or 0.5 × 4 M1

(1 × 6) + (0.875 × 8) + (0.8 × 5) + (0.5 × 4) (= 19) M1

((their 19)/(their 23)) × 100 M1

82.6(%) A1

7(iii) Japanese 2 B1

SPR largest B1

7(iv) Chemistry 2 B1

CPR largest and largest number of enrolments B1

7(v) total languages passes found using CPR 3

(0.800 × 25) + (0.667 × 12) + (0.765 × 17) (= 41) M1*

((their 41)/(25 + 12 + 17)) × 100 M1dep

75.9(%) A1

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

8(i) attempted use of class mid-points 3

(85, 92.5, 97.5, 110, 132.5) M1*

correct method for mean (Σfx = 2610) M1dep

104.4 (m) A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 5 of 8


4040/13 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

8(ii) indication of area being proportional to class frequency 4 M1

3 or 4 correct heights drawn A2


(allow A1 for two correct)

fully correct histogram A1

8(iii) (their Σfx from (i)) + (165) – (1 × 85) oe (= 2690) 2 M1

107.6 (m) A1

8(iv) (7/20) × (6/19) × (5/18) 2 M1

7/228 oe (0.0307) A1

8(v) (4/20) × (3/19) × (9/18) 3 M1

×3 M1

9/190 oe (0.0474) A1

8(vi) (4/20) × (9/19) × (7/18) × 6 2 M1

21/95 oe (0.221) A1

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

9(i)(a) 1.16 1 B1

9(i)(b) Q1 find salt content for cf = 16 (1.07) 4 M1

Q3 find salt content for cf = 48 (1.24) M1

use of IQR = Q3 – Q1 M1

0.17 A1

9(i)(c) attempt to read cf for salt content 1.35 (= 60) 2 M1


and express as percentage of 64

awrt 94 A1

9(ii)(a) 8 1 B1

9(ii)(b) attempt to read salt content 2 M1


for cf = their 8 + 0.5 × (64 – their 8) (= 36)

1.18 A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 6 of 8


4040/13 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

9(iii) product of four decreasing fractions, 3 M1*


denominators 64, 63, 62, 61

first numerator 64 – their 8 M1dep

0.578 or 0.58 (8745/15128) A1

9(iv) 1 – their 0.578 2 M1

0.422 or 0.42 ft (6383/15128) A1

9(v) IQR 1 B1
dispersion unchanged by same change in all population
elements/Q1, Q3 both decrease by same amount so
difference unchanged.

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

10(i) correctly plotted points 2 B2


(allow B1 for 6 or 7 correctly plotted)

10(ii) method for calculating LSA 3 M1

plot of (21.25, 15) A1

plot of (40.625, 29.375) and (60, 43.75) B1

10(iii) straight line through at least two of their plotted points in (ii) 4 B1

correct method for gradient of their line M1

correct method for intercept of their line M1

m = 0.74 to 0.75 and c = 0 to – 1 inclusive A1

10(iv)(a) find y from equation or graph using x = 55 2 M1

$40 A1

10(iv)(b) find x from equation or graph using y = 50 2 M1

$70 A1

10(v) as c ≈ 0, LOBF is y ≈ 0.74x or y ≈ 74% of x 2 M1


or
use equation or line to find y for chosen value of x
and calculate ((x – y)/x) ¯100

25(%) – 30(%) A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 7 of 8


4040/13 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

10(vi) choice consistent with reason offered 1 B1


e.g. C because customer paid asking price/
graph shows plot to deviate most from LOBF on upper side

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

11(i) 33 1 B1

11(ii) 8 1 B1

11(iii) 17 + 15 + 16 + 8 (= 56) 3 M1

((their 56)/(their 56 + 8 + 6)) × 100 M1

80(%) A1

11(iv) use of r2 to find radius 5 M1

r = √[(30/40) × 3.52] M1

chart drawn with r = 2.9 cm to 3.1 cm A1

correct method of angle calculation M1

correct angles: in favour 192°, against 96°, undecided 72°, all A1


±2°, and chart complete with labelling

11(v) in favour: 3 B1
smaller proportion of males/greater proportion of females

against: B1
greater proportion of males/smaller proportion of females

undecided: B1
proportion of males and females same/approx same

11(vi)(a) clear visual representation of (relative) total/number(s) in 1 B1


categories

11(vi)(b) clear visual representation of relative proportions in 1 B1


categories

11(vii) closed 1 B1
apparently customers were restricted to only three possible
responses

© UCLES 2017 Page 8 of 8


Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge Ordinary Level
* 3 8 9 8 0 9 0 4 3 4 *

STATISTICS 4040/12
Paper 1 October/November 2018
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
Additional Materials: Pair of compasses
Protractor
Electronic calculator

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
Essential working must be shown for full marks to be awarded.
Electronic calculators should be used.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The total number of marks for this paper is 100.

This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

DC (ST/SG) 151388/1
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
2

1 Six statistical terms associated with the collection of data are

survey,
census,
random,
systematic,
quota,
and stratified.

In each of the following statements one of these terms has been omitted.
Complete each statement by inserting the appropriate term.

(a) If a population is made up of different categories, and a sample is required which will be

representative of the population in terms of these categories, a .........................................

sample should be selected. [1]

(b) When selecting a sample from a population, in order to ensure that the sampling method is

free from bias, a ......................................... sample should be selected. [1]

(c) Data on every element of a population is collected when a ......................................... is

conducted. [1]

(d) When selecting a sample from a population without the use of a sampling frame,

a ......................................... sample may be selected. [1]

© UCLES 2018 4040/12/O/N/18


3

2 In a particular town there are often cuts in the electrical power supply. The following data shows,
for a period of 8 weeks, the number of days in each week on which there were power cuts.

2 5 2 0 2 0 7 4

(a) For this period, find the mean number of days per week on which

(i) there were power cuts,

...................................................[2]
(ii) there were no power cuts.

...................................................[1]

(b) For this period, find the total number of days on which there were no power cuts.

...................................................[1]

© UCLES 2018 4040/12/O/N/18 [Turn over


4

3 The guest rooms in a hotel are of either standard or superior quality, are either non-smoking or
smoking, and have either a city view or a mountain view.
The diagram below shows the number of these rooms which are one or more of standard quality,
non-smoking, and city view.

Standard

9 5
10

6 7 3

Non-smoking City view

(a) Use this information to find the number of guest rooms which are

(i) non-smoking,

...................................................[1]

(ii) standard quality and non-smoking,

...................................................[1]

(iii) standard quality, with a mountain view,

...................................................[1]

(iv) superior quality and smoking, with a city view.

...................................................[1]

(b) State precisely the extra information which you would need to find the total number of guest
rooms in the hotel.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2018 4040/12/O/N/18


5

4 At a telephone company, statistical measures are calculated for the lengths of an equally large
number of telephone calls made by each of two people. The following values, in minutes, are
obtained.

Measure Person A Person B


Median 3.55 3.45
Lower quartile 1.90 1.83
Upper quartile 5.20 9.76
40th percentile 3.07 2.94

(a) Write down the percentage of calls whose length is

(i) for Person A,

(a) less than 5.20 minutes,

...................................................[1]

(b) more than 3.07 minutes,

...................................................[1]

(ii) for Person B,

(a) between 1.83 minutes and 2.94 minutes,

...................................................[1]

(b) less than 3.45 minutes or more than 9.76 minutes.

...................................................[1]

A trainee statistician at the company inspects the measures and makes the following statement to
her supervisor.

‘Because the median length of a call from Person A is greater than the median length of a call from
Person B, the total length of all the calls from Person A must be greater than the total length of all
the calls from Person B.’

(b) Explain whether or not you agree with the trainee.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2018 4040/12/O/N/18 [Turn over


6

5 In a city there are 15 tennis clubs. The following table shows the number of indoor and outdoor
courts at each of these clubs.

Number of outdoor courts


2 3 4 6 8
0 1 1 2 1 2
Number 2 0 0 3 1 0
of indoor
courts 3 0 0 0 2 0
4 0 0 0 1 1

For example, there are 3 clubs with 4 outdoor courts and 2 indoor courts.

(a) Find the number of clubs with

(i) no indoor courts,

...................................................[1]
(ii) at least 4 outdoor courts.

...................................................[1]

(b) Calculate the total number of outdoor courts at the city’s tennis clubs.

...................................................[2]

© UCLES 2018 4040/12/O/N/18


7

(c) Complete the following table to show the frequency distribution of the total number of courts
per club.

Total number of
Number of clubs, f
courts, x
2 1

[2]

(d) A national tennis coach, investigating the facilities available in different cities, requests from
each city information on the number of courts at clubs in the city, summarised in one table.

State, giving a reason, whether you would expect the coach to prefer this to be in the form of
the first or second table in this question.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2018 4040/12/O/N/18 [Turn over


8

6 The main political parties in a country are the Modern Left, the Reform Party, and the Central
Union. In an opinion poll before an election, 1800 voters were questioned on which party they
supported. Results are shown in the following pie chart, of radius 4 cm, which is drawn to scale.

Other or
undecided
Modern
Left

Central
Union
Reform
Party

Use the chart to find the number of these voters who

(a) supported the Central Union,

...................................................[2]

(b) did not support the Reform Party.

...................................................[2]

In a later poll, 3000 voters were questioned.

(c) If a comparative pie chart were drawn to show the results of this later poll, find, correct to
1 decimal place, its radius.

...................................................[3]

© UCLES 2018 4040/12/O/N/18


9

7 Warona buys a pack of 7 toothbrushes, of which 1 is red, 2 are green, and 4 are blue. She opens
the pack, selects a toothbrush at random, and starts using it.

(a) Write down the probability that it is blue.

...................................................[1]

Warona’s dentist advises that one toothbrush should be used for 3 months, then thrown away.
Warona follows the advice, selecting a new toothbrush at random from those remaining in the
pack each time she throws away a used toothbrush.

(b) Given that the first toothbrush selected was blue, find the probability that the toothbrushes
being used 8 months and 11 months after opening the pack are the same colour as each
other.

...................................................[7]

© UCLES 2018 4040/12/O/N/18 [Turn over


10

8 Bruce is a nutritionist. He collects information on the daily energy intake from food and drink of
volunteer groups of 60 men and 60 women. His results, in Calories (a continuous variable), are
illustrated in the cumulative frequency curves below.

60

50
Women
Men
40
Cumulative
frequency
(volunteers)
30

20

10

0
0 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3200
Daily energy intake (Calories)

(a) Use the graph to estimate, for the daily energy intake of the men,

(i) the median,

.................................... Calories [1]

(ii) the interquartile range.

.................................... Calories [4]

© UCLES 2018 4040/12/O/N/18


11

(b) Use the graph to estimate, for the daily energy intake of the women,

(i) the 85th percentile,

.................................... Calories [2]

(ii) the value of p if the pth percentile is 2340 Calories.

...................................................[2]

Bruce observes from the graph that the interquartile range of the daily energy intake for women is
smaller than that for men.

(c) Explain how he is able to make this observation without calculating the interquartile range of
both groups of volunteers.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

Bruce’s rules for a healthy diet are a maximum daily energy intake of 2500 Calories for men, and
2000 Calories for women.

(d) Estimate the number of these men and women whose diet Bruce judged to be not healthy.

Number of men ......................................................

Number of women ................................................. [2]

The volunteers themselves had recorded energy intake from their own estimates of the amounts
of food and drink they had consumed.
Bruce’s work colleague Sheila claims that, generally, women record values accurately, but men
underestimate values by about 300 Calories.

(e) Estimate the number of these men whose diet Bruce should have judged to be not healthy, if
Sheila’s claim is correct.

...................................................[2]

© UCLES 2018 4040/12/O/N/18 [Turn over


12

9 In this question calculate all injury rates per thousand. Where values do not work out
exactly give your answers to 1 decimal place.

The table below gives information on the number of employees, and the number of injuries they
suffered, in the Fire Service of a city in 2016. It also shows the standard population for the Fire
Services of the area in which the city is situated.

Number of Number of Job group Standard


Job group
injuries employees injury rate population (%)
Control 0 12 3
Support 3 50 12
Full-time firefighter 91 260 55
Part-time firefighter 7 70 25
Trainee firefighter 8 25 5

(a) Calculate the crude injury rate for this Fire Service.

...................................................[4]

(b) Calculate the injury rate for each job group and insert the values in the table above.

[2]

(c) Use your results from part (b) to calculate the standardised injury rate for this Fire Service.

...................................................[4]

© UCLES 2018 4040/12/O/N/18


13

(d) Explain, by reference to the information given in the table and the values calculated in part (b),
why the standardised injury rate is smaller than the crude injury rate in this case.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[3]

Some of the injuries suffered by employees required hospital treatment, and they all occurred in
the firefighter groups. Information on these injuries is shown in the table below.

Number of injuries requiring


Job group Number of injuries
hospital treatment
Full-time firefighter 91 12
Part-time firefighter 7 1
Trainee firefighter 8 1

(e) Find the job group in which an injured employee was most likely to require hospital treatment.
Justify your answer.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2018 4040/12/O/N/18 [Turn over


14

10 The loggerhead sea turtle is an endangered species. To increase the chances of survival of baby
turtles, a nursery (conservation centre) collects them from the beach when the turtle eggs hatch,
and cares for them until they are older.
The following table summarises the masses, in grams, of a sample of baby turtles collected by the
nursery.

Number of
Mass (g)
turtles
15 – under 17 4
17 – under 18 7
18 – under 19 12
19 – under 20 15
20 – under 22 9
22 – under 25 3

(a) Estimate, in grams, the mean and standard deviation of these masses. Give your answers to
3 significant figures.

Mean = ......................................................

Standard deviation = ..................................................[7]

© UCLES 2018 4040/12/O/N/18


15

Later, the nursery releases these turtles into the sea.


The following table summarises the masses of the turtles when released.

Mass (g) Number of turtles


195 – under 215 5
215 – under 230 6
230 – under 235 7
235 – under 245 17
245 – under 265 15

(b) On the grid below draw a histogram to illustrate the data in this table. The rectangle
representing the 235 – under 245 class has already been drawn for you.

25

20

15
Number
of turtles
per 10 g
10

0
190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270
Mass (g)
[4]

The nursery’s policy is to release a turtle when its mass has become a certain multiple, k, of the
mass when collected.

(c) Explain why k cannot be found accurately from the two tables of data above.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

(d) Use the mid-class values of the modal classes from the two tables of data above to estimate
k to the nearest integer.

...................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 4040/12/O/N/18 [Turn over
16

11 An English teacher gives the 26 pupils present in her class a spelling test. She reads aloud ten
words of different lengths and the pupils write them down. The following table summarises the
results.

Word length, x
3 3 4 6 6 8 9 9 10 12
(number of letters)
Number of pupils with
24 23 21 19 18 17 15 13 11 9
correct spelling, y

(a) Plot these data on the grid below.

y
30

25

20

Number
of pupils
with 15
correct
spelling

10

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 x

Word length (number of letters)


[2]

(b) Describe fully the correlation shown by the plotted points.

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2018 4040/12/O/N/18


17

The data have an overall mean of (7, 17) and a lower semi-average of (4.4, 21).

(c) Find the upper semi-average and plot this and the two given averages on your graph.

[3]

(d) Use your plotted averages to draw a line of best fit, and find its equation in the form
y = mx + c .

...................................................[4]

(e) Use your line to estimate the number of pupils who would spell a word with 5 letters correctly.

...................................................[2]

The teacher also reads aloud the following three-word sentence and the 26 pupils write it down.

STUDY CREATES OPPORTUNITIES

A pupil is chosen at random.

(f) Estimate the probability that the pupil’s answer contains the correct spelling of all three words.

...................................................[3]

© UCLES 2018 4040/12/O/N/18


18

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2018 4040/12/O/N/18


19

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2018 4040/12/O/N/18


20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2018 4040/12/O/N/18


Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge Ordinary Level

STATISTICS 4040/12
Paper 1 October/November 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2018 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 9 printed pages.

© UCLES 2018 [Turn over


4040/12 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2018

Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers.
They should be applied alongside the specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors
for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit
is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the syllabus and mark scheme,
referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these
features are specifically assessed by the question as indicated by the mark scheme. The
meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed
instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question
(however; the use of the full mark range may be limited according to the quality of the candidate
responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should
not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2018 Page 2 of 9


4040/12 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2018

MARK SCHEME NOTES

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark
schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method marks, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. For
accuracy marks to be given, the associated Method mark must be earned or implied.

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of Method marks.

When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are in principle independent
unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly where there are several B marks
allocated. The notation ‘dep’ is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an
earlier, asterisked, mark in the scheme.

The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from
previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A and B marks are given for correct work only.

Abbreviations

AG answer given on question paper


awrt answer which rounds to
cao correct answer only
dep dependent
ft follow through after error
oe or equivalent
SC special case
soi seen or implied
www without wrong working

© UCLES 2018 Page 3 of 9


4040/12 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2018

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

1(a) stratified 1 B1

1(b) random 1 B1

1(c) census 1 B1

1(d) quota 1 B1

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

2(a)(i) (2 + 5 + 2 + 0 + 2 + 0 + 7 + 4)/8 (= 22/8) 2 M1

2.75 A1

2(a)(ii) 4.25 or 7 – their 2.75 ft 1 B1

2(b) 34 1 B1

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

3(a)(i) 32 1 B1

3(a)(ii) 19 1 B1

3(a)(iii) 13 1 B1

3(a)(iv) 3 1 B1

3(b) number of superior, smoking, mountain view rooms 1 B1


or number of non standard, smoking, non city view rooms

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

4(a)(i)(a) 75[%] 1 B1

4(a)(i)(b) 60[%] 1 B1

4(a)(ii)(a) 15[%] 1 B1

4(a)(ii)(b) 75[%] 1 B1

4(b) disagree, true if comparing means but not median/ 1 B1


cannot say, median unaffected by extreme values and these are
unknown/
cannot say, there could be extremely large values for either
person making their total larger/
disagree, high value of Q3 for B indicates some v long calls

© UCLES 2018 Page 4 of 9


4040/12 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2018

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

5(a)(i) 7 1 B1

5(a)(ii) 13 1 B1

5(b) Σ(column total ¯ column value) (2 + 3 + 20 + 30 + 24) 2 M1

79 A1

5(c) x values [2], 3, 4, [5], 6, [7], 8, 9, 10, [11], 12 not repeated 2 B1

corresponding f values B1
[1], 1, 2, [0], 4, [0], 3, 2, 1, [0], 1

5(d) either chosen with good justification, e.g. 1 B1


first, second can be obtained from first if required but not vv
first, climate may make indoor courts essential
first, it contains more information than second
second, information in condensed form more useful to coach
when comparing many different cities

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

6(a) (110/360) ¯ 1800 2 M1

550 A1

6(b) ((360 – 90)/360) ¯ 1800 oe 2 M1

1350 A1

6(c) any use of squares of radii 3 M1

correct use of squares of radii M1

5.2 [cm] A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 5 of 9


4040/12 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2018

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

7(a) 4/7 1 B1

7(b) any product of two or more probabilities 7 M1


with denominators n, n – 1 ...

any product including two probabilities with numerators 2,1 or 3, 2 M1

any product of three probabilities M1

any one of the five cases A1


(1/6) ¯ (2/5) ¯ (1/4) [RGG]
or (3/6) ¯ (2/5) ¯ (1/4) [BGG]
or (1/6) ¯ (3/5) ¯ (2/4) [RBB]
or (2/6) ¯ (3/5) ¯ (2/4) [GBB]
or (3/6) ¯ (2/5) ¯ (1/4) [BBB]

any other two of the five cases A1

addition of all five correct cases M1

4/15 oe (0.267) A1

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

8(a)(i) 2620 1 B1

8(a)(ii) find energy intake for cf = 15 (2400) 4 M1

find energy intake for cf = 45 (2800) M1

use of IQR = Q3 – Q1 M1

400 A1

8(b)(i) read Calories for cf = 0.85¯60 (= 51) 2 M1

2560 A1

8(b)(ii) express cf reading for 2340 (= 39) as percentage of 60 2 M1

65 A1

8(c) central part of graph for women is steeper than that for men 1 B1
[indicating Q1, Q3 closer together] oe

8(d) 60 – their 21 or 60 – their 9 2 M1

men 39 and women 51 A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 6 of 9


4040/12 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2018

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

8(e) use cf for 2200 Calories for men (= 5) 2 M1

55 A1

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

9(a) 0 + 3 + 91 + 7 + 8 (= 109) 4 M1

12 + 50 + 260 + 70 + 25 (= 417) M1

(their 109/their 417) ¯ 1000 M1

261.4 A1

9(b) correct method for any group other than Control 2 M1

0 60 350 100 320 A1

9(c) any group rate other than control multiplied by standard 4 M1


population figure

sum of four such products M1

[(0 ¯ 0.03)] + (60 ¯ 0.12) + (350 ¯ 0.55) + (100 ¯ 0.25) + (320 A1


¯ 0.05)

240.7 A1

9(d) indication of considering difference between population structure 3 B1


and standard population structure

specific focus on full-time or part-time firefighters B1

full-time firefighters, which have highest injury rate, constitute a B1


higher proportion in population than in standard population

9(e) compare values of 12/91, 1/7, 1/8 (0.132, 0.143, 0.125) 2 M1

part-time firefighter A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 7 of 9


4040/12 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2018

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

10(a) attempted use of class mid-points 7 M1*


(16 17.5 18.5 19.5 21 23.5)

correct method for mean (Σfx = 960.5) M1dep

19.2 or 19.21 A1

finding values of f ¯ variable squared M1

correct method for SD or variance (Σfx2 = 18604.25) M1dep

1.74 – 1.75 A1

19.2 and 1.75 A1

10(b) indication of area being proportional to class frequency 4 M1

3 or 4 correct heights drawn 2.5 4 14 7.5 A2


(allow A1 for two correct)

fully correct histogram A1

10(c) masses of individual turtles unknown oe 1 B1

10(d) evidence of 19 – 20 and 235 – 245 classes being used 3 M1

240/19.5 A1

12 A1

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

11(a) correctly plotted points 2 B2


(allow B1 for 8 or 9 correct)

11(b) strong 2 B1

negative B1

11(c) method for USA 3 M1

plot of (9.6, 13) A1

plot of (4.4, 21) and (7, 17) B1

11(d) straight line through at least two of their plots in (c) 4 B1

correct method for gradient M1

correct method for c M1

m = –1.54 to – 1.53 and c = 27 to 28 inclusive A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 8 of 9


4040/12 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2018

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

11(e) use x = 5 in their equation or to read from their line 2 M1

20 ft A1

11(f) use their answer from (e) 3 M1


and use 7 and 13 in their equation or to read from their line

(their 20/26) ¯ (17/26) ¯ (their 8/26) M1

0.155 oe A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 9 of 9


Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge Ordinary Level
* 4 0 0 0 1 7 7 4 8 8 *

STATISTICS 4040/13
Paper 1 October/November 2018
2 hours 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
Additional Materials: Pair of compasses
Protractor
Electronic calculator

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


If working is needed for any question it must be shown below that question.
Essential working must be shown for full marks to be awarded.
Electronic calculators should be used.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The total number of marks for this paper is 100.

This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

DC (KS) 164028
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
2

1 Six statistical terms associated with the collection of data are

survey,
census,
random,
systematic,
quota,
and stratified.

In each of the following statements one of these terms has been omitted.
Complete each statement by inserting the appropriate term.

(a) If a population is made up of different categories, and a sample is required which will be

representative of the population in terms of these categories, a .........................................

sample should be selected. [1]

(b) When selecting a sample from a population, in order to ensure that the sampling method is

free from bias, a ......................................... sample should be selected. [1]

(c) Data on every element of a population is collected when a ......................................... is

conducted. [1]

(d) When selecting a sample from a population without the use of a sampling frame,

a ......................................... sample may be selected. [1]

© UCLES 2018 4040/13/O/N/18


3

2 In a particular town there are often cuts in the electrical power supply. The following data shows,
for a period of 8 weeks, the number of days in each week on which there were power cuts.

2 5 2 0 2 0 7 4

(a) For this period, find the mean number of days per week on which

(i) there were power cuts,

...................................................[2]
(ii) there were no power cuts.

...................................................[1]

(b) For this period, find the total number of days on which there were no power cuts.

...................................................[1]

© UCLES 2018 4040/13/O/N/18 [Turn over


4

3 The guest rooms in a hotel are of either standard or superior quality, are either non-smoking or
smoking, and have either a city view or a mountain view.
The diagram below shows the number of these rooms which are one or more of standard quality,
non-smoking, and city view.

Standard

9 5
10

6 7 3

Non-smoking City view

(a) Use this information to find the number of guest rooms which are

(i) non-smoking,

...................................................[1]

(ii) standard quality and non-smoking,

...................................................[1]

(iii) standard quality, with a mountain view,

...................................................[1]

(iv) superior quality and smoking, with a city view.

...................................................[1]

(b) State precisely the extra information which you would need to find the total number of guest
rooms in the hotel.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2018 4040/13/O/N/18


5

4 At a telephone company, statistical measures are calculated for the lengths of an equally large
number of telephone calls made by each of two people. The following values, in minutes, are
obtained.

Measure Person A Person B


Median 3.55 3.45
Lower quartile 1.90 1.83
Upper quartile 5.20 9.76
40th percentile 3.07 2.94

(a) Write down the percentage of calls whose length is

(i) for Person A,

(a) less than 5.20 minutes,

...................................................[1]

(b) more than 3.07 minutes,

...................................................[1]

(ii) for Person B,

(a) between 1.83 minutes and 2.94 minutes,

...................................................[1]

(b) less than 3.45 minutes or more than 9.76 minutes.

...................................................[1]

A trainee statistician at the company inspects the measures and makes the following statement to
her supervisor.

‘Because the median length of a call from Person A is greater than the median length of a call from
Person B, the total length of all the calls from Person A must be greater than the total length of all
the calls from Person B.’

(b) Explain whether or not you agree with the trainee.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2018 4040/13/O/N/18 [Turn over


6

5 In a city there are 15 tennis clubs. The following table shows the number of indoor and outdoor
courts at each of these clubs.

Number of outdoor courts


2 3 4 6 8
0 1 1 2 1 2
Number 2 0 0 3 1 0
of indoor
courts 3 0 0 0 2 0
4 0 0 0 1 1

For example, there are 3 clubs with 4 outdoor courts and 2 indoor courts.

(a) Find the number of clubs with

(i) no indoor courts,

...................................................[1]
(ii) at least 4 outdoor courts.

...................................................[1]

(b) Calculate the total number of outdoor courts at the city’s tennis clubs.

...................................................[2]

© UCLES 2018 4040/13/O/N/18


7

(c) Complete the following table to show the frequency distribution of the total number of courts
per club.

Total number of
Number of clubs, f
courts, x
2 1

[2]

(d) A national tennis coach, investigating the facilities available in different cities, requests from
each city information on the number of courts at clubs in the city, summarised in one table.

State, giving a reason, whether you would expect the coach to prefer this to be in the form of
the first or second table in this question.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2018 4040/13/O/N/18 [Turn over


8

6 The main political parties in a country are the Modern Left, the Reform Party, and the Central
Union. In an opinion poll before an election, 1800 voters were questioned on which party they
supported. Results are shown in the following pie chart, of radius 4 cm, which is drawn to scale.

Other or
undecided
Modern
Left

Central
Union
Reform
Party

Use the chart to find the number of these voters who

(a) supported the Central Union,

...................................................[2]

(b) did not support the Reform Party.

...................................................[2]

In a later poll, 3000 voters were questioned.

(c) If a comparative pie chart were drawn to show the results of this later poll, find, correct to
1 decimal place, its radius.

...................................................[3]

© UCLES 2018 4040/13/O/N/18


9

7 Warona buys a pack of 7 toothbrushes, of which 1 is red, 2 are green, and 4 are blue. She opens
the pack, selects a toothbrush at random, and starts using it.

(a) Write down the probability that it is blue.

...................................................[1]

Warona’s dentist advises that one toothbrush should be used for 3 months, then thrown away.
Warona follows the advice, selecting a new toothbrush at random from those remaining in the
pack each time she throws away a used toothbrush.

(b) Given that the first toothbrush selected was blue, find the probability that the toothbrushes
being used 8 months and 11 months after opening the pack are the same colour as each
other.

...................................................[7]

© UCLES 2018 4040/13/O/N/18 [Turn over


10

8 Bruce is a nutritionist. He collects information on the daily energy intake from food and drink of
volunteer groups of 60 men and 60 women. His results, in Calories (a continuous variable), are
illustrated in the cumulative frequency curves below.

60

50
Women
Men
40
Cumulative
frequency
(volunteers)
30

20

10

0
0 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3200
Daily energy intake (Calories)

(a) Use the graph to estimate, for the daily energy intake of the men,

(i) the median,

.................................... Calories [1]

(ii) the interquartile range.

.................................... Calories [4]

© UCLES 2018 4040/13/O/N/18


11

(b) Use the graph to estimate, for the daily energy intake of the women,

(i) the 85th percentile,

.................................... Calories [2]

(ii) the value of p if the pth percentile is 2340 Calories.

...................................................[2]

Bruce observes from the graph that the interquartile range of the daily energy intake for women is
smaller than that for men.

(c) Explain how he is able to make this observation without calculating the interquartile range of
both groups of volunteers.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

Bruce’s rules for a healthy diet are a maximum daily energy intake of 2500 Calories for men, and
2000 Calories for women.

(d) Estimate the number of these men and women whose diet Bruce judged to be not healthy.

Number of men ......................................................

Number of women ................................................. [2]

The volunteers themselves had recorded energy intake from their own estimates of the amounts
of food and drink they had consumed.
Bruce’s work colleague Sheila claims that, generally, women record values accurately, but men
underestimate values by about 300 Calories.

(e) Estimate the number of these men whose diet Bruce should have judged to be not healthy, if
Sheila’s claim is correct.

...................................................[2]

© UCLES 2018 4040/13/O/N/18 [Turn over


12

9 In this question calculate all injury rates per thousand. Where values do not work out
exactly give your answers to 1 decimal place.

The table below gives information on the number of employees, and the number of injuries they
suffered, in the Fire Service of a city in 2016. It also shows the standard population for the Fire
Services of the area in which the city is situated.

Number of Number of Job group Standard


Job group
injuries employees injury rate population (%)
Control 0 12 3
Support 3 50 12
Full-time firefighter 91 260 55
Part-time firefighter 7 70 25
Trainee firefighter 8 25 5

(a) Calculate the crude injury rate for this Fire Service.

...................................................[4]

(b) Calculate the injury rate for each job group and insert the values in the table above.

[2]

(c) Use your results from part (b) to calculate the standardised injury rate for this Fire Service.

...................................................[4]

© UCLES 2018 4040/13/O/N/18


13

(d) Explain, by reference to the information given in the table and the values calculated in part (b),
why the standardised injury rate is smaller than the crude injury rate in this case.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[3]

Some of the injuries suffered by employees required hospital treatment, and they all occurred in
the firefighter groups. Information on these injuries is shown in the table below.

Number of injuries requiring


Job group Number of injuries
hospital treatment
Full-time firefighter 91 12
Part-time firefighter 7 1
Trainee firefighter 8 1

(e) Find the job group in which an injured employee was most likely to require hospital treatment.
Justify your answer.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2018 4040/13/O/N/18 [Turn over


14

10 The loggerhead sea turtle is an endangered species. To increase the chances of survival of baby
turtles, a nursery (conservation centre) collects them from the beach when the turtle eggs hatch,
and cares for them until they are older.
The following table summarises the masses, in grams, of a sample of baby turtles collected by the
nursery.

Number of
Mass (g)
turtles
15 – under 17 4
17 – under 18 7
18 – under 19 12
19 – under 20 15
20 – under 22 9
22 – under 25 3

(a) Estimate, in grams, the mean and standard deviation of these masses. Give your answers to
3 significant figures.

Mean = ......................................................

Standard deviation = ..................................................[7]

© UCLES 2018 4040/13/O/N/18


15

Later, the nursery releases these turtles into the sea.


The following table summarises the masses of the turtles when released.

Mass (g) Number of turtles


195 – under 215 5
215 – under 230 6
230 – under 235 7
235 – under 245 17
245 – under 265 15

(b) On the grid below draw a histogram to illustrate the data in this table. The rectangle
representing the 235 – under 245 class has already been drawn for you.

25

20

15
Number
of turtles
per 10 g
10

0
190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270
Mass (g)
[4]

The nursery’s policy is to release a turtle when its mass has become a certain multiple, k, of the
mass when collected.

(c) Explain why k cannot be found accurately from the two tables of data above.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

(d) Use the mid-class values of the modal classes from the two tables of data above to estimate
k to the nearest integer.

...................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 4040/13/O/N/18 [Turn over
16

11 An English teacher gives the 26 pupils present in her class a spelling test. She reads aloud ten
words of different lengths and the pupils write them down. The following table summarises the
results.

Word length, x
3 3 4 6 6 8 9 9 10 12
(number of letters)
Number of pupils with
24 23 21 19 18 17 15 13 11 9
correct spelling, y

(a) Plot these data on the grid below.

y
30

25

20

Number
of pupils
with 15
correct
spelling

10

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 x

Word length (number of letters)


[2]

(b) Describe fully the correlation shown by the plotted points.

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

© UCLES 2018 4040/13/O/N/18


17

The data have an overall mean of (7, 17) and a lower semi-average of (4.4, 21).

(c) Find the upper semi-average and plot this and the two given averages on your graph.

[3]

(d) Use your plotted averages to draw a line of best fit, and find its equation in the form
y = mx + c .

...................................................[4]

(e) Use your line to estimate the number of pupils who would spell a word with 5 letters correctly.

...................................................[2]

The teacher also reads aloud the following three-word sentence and the 26 pupils write it down.

STUDY CREATES OPPORTUNITIES

A pupil is chosen at random.

(f) Estimate the probability that the pupil’s answer contains the correct spelling of all three words.

...................................................[3]

© UCLES 2018 4040/13/O/N/18


18

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2018 4040/13/O/N/18


19

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2018 4040/13/O/N/18


20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2018 4040/13/O/N/18


Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge Ordinary Level

STATISTICS 4040/13
Paper 1 October/November 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2018 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 9 printed pages.

© UCLES 2018 [Turn over


4040/13 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2018

Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers.
They should be applied alongside the specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors
for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit
is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the syllabus and mark scheme,
referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these
features are specifically assessed by the question as indicated by the mark scheme. The
meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed
instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question
(however; the use of the full mark range may be limited according to the quality of the candidate
responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should
not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2018 Page 2 of 9


4040/13 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2018

MARK SCHEME NOTES

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark
schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method marks, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. For
accuracy marks to be given, the associated Method mark must be earned or implied.

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of Method marks.

When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are in principle independent
unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly where there are several B marks
allocated. The notation ‘dep’ is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an
earlier, asterisked, mark in the scheme.

The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from
previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A and B marks are given for correct work only.

Abbreviations

AG answer given on question paper


awrt answer which rounds to
cao correct answer only
dep dependent
ft follow through after error
oe or equivalent
SC special case
soi seen or implied
www without wrong working

© UCLES 2018 Page 3 of 9


4040/13 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2018

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

1(a) stratified 1 B1

1(b) random 1 B1

1(c) census 1 B1

1(d) quota 1 B1

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

2(a)(i) (2 + 5 + 2 + 0 + 2 + 0 + 7 + 4)/8 (= 22/8) 2 M1

2.75 A1

2(a)(ii) 4.25 or 7 – their 2.75 ft 1 B1

2(b) 34 1 B1

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

3(a)(i) 32 1 B1

3(a)(ii) 19 1 B1

3(a)(iii) 13 1 B1

3(a)(iv) 3 1 B1

3(b) number of superior, smoking, mountain view rooms 1 B1


or number of non standard, smoking, non city view rooms

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

4(a)(i)(a) 75[%] 1 B1

4(a)(i)(b) 60[%] 1 B1

4(a)(ii)(a) 15[%] 1 B1

4(a)(ii)(b) 75[%] 1 B1

4(b) disagree, true if comparing means but not median/ 1 B1


cannot say, median unaffected by extreme values and these are
unknown/
cannot say, there could be extremely large values for either
person making their total larger/
disagree, high value of Q3 for B indicates some v long calls

© UCLES 2018 Page 4 of 9


4040/13 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2018

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

5(a)(i) 7 1 B1

5(a)(ii) 13 1 B1

5(b) Σ(column total ¯ column value) (2 + 3 + 20 + 30 + 24) 2 M1

79 A1

5(c) x values [2], 3, 4, [5], 6, [7], 8, 9, 10, [11], 12 not repeated 2 B1

corresponding f values B1
[1], 1, 2, [0], 4, [0], 3, 2, 1, [0], 1

5(d) either chosen with good justification, e.g. 1 B1


first, second can be obtained from first if required but not vv
first, climate may make indoor courts essential
first, it contains more information than second
second, information in condensed form more useful to coach
when comparing many different cities

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

6(a) (110/360) ¯ 1800 2 M1

550 A1

6(b) ((360 – 90)/360) ¯ 1800 oe 2 M1

1350 A1

6(c) any use of squares of radii 3 M1

correct use of squares of radii M1

5.2 [cm] A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 5 of 9


4040/13 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2018

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

7(a) 4/7 1 B1

7(b) any product of two or more probabilities 7 M1


with denominators n, n – 1 ...

any product including two probabilities with numerators 2,1 or 3, 2 M1

any product of three probabilities M1

any one of the five cases A1


(1/6) ¯ (2/5) ¯ (1/4) [RGG]
or (3/6) ¯ (2/5) ¯ (1/4) [BGG]
or (1/6) ¯ (3/5) ¯ (2/4) [RBB]
or (2/6) ¯ (3/5) ¯ (2/4) [GBB]
or (3/6) ¯ (2/5) ¯ (1/4) [BBB]

any other two of the five cases A1

addition of all five correct cases M1

4/15 oe (0.267) A1

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

8(a)(i) 2620 1 B1

8(a)(ii) find energy intake for cf = 15 (2400) 4 M1

find energy intake for cf = 45 (2800) M1

use of IQR = Q3 – Q1 M1

400 A1

8(b)(i) read Calories for cf = 0.85¯60 (= 51) 2 M1

2560 A1

8(b)(ii) express cf reading for 2340 (= 39) as percentage of 60 2 M1

65 A1

8(c) central part of graph for women is steeper than that for men 1 B1
[indicating Q1, Q3 closer together] oe

8(d) 60 – their 21 or 60 – their 9 2 M1

men 39 and women 51 A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 6 of 9


4040/13 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2018

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

8(e) use cf for 2200 Calories for men (= 5) 2 M1

55 A1

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

9(a) 0 + 3 + 91 + 7 + 8 (= 109) 4 M1

12 + 50 + 260 + 70 + 25 (= 417) M1

(their 109/their 417) ¯ 1000 M1

261.4 A1

9(b) correct method for any group other than Control 2 M1

0 60 350 100 320 A1

9(c) any group rate other than control multiplied by standard 4 M1


population figure

sum of four such products M1

[(0 ¯ 0.03)] + (60 ¯ 0.12) + (350 ¯ 0.55) + (100 ¯ 0.25) + (320 A1


¯ 0.05)

240.7 A1

9(d) indication of considering difference between population structure 3 B1


and standard population structure

specific focus on full-time or part-time firefighters B1

full-time firefighters, which have highest injury rate, constitute a B1


higher proportion in population than in standard population

9(e) compare values of 12/91, 1/7, 1/8 (0.132, 0.143, 0.125) 2 M1

part-time firefighter A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 7 of 9


4040/13 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2018

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

10(a) attempted use of class mid-points 7 M1*


(16 17.5 18.5 19.5 21 23.5)

correct method for mean (Σfx = 960.5) M1dep

19.2 or 19.21 A1

finding values of f ¯ variable squared M1

correct method for SD or variance (Σfx2 = 18604.25) M1dep

1.74 – 1.75 A1

19.2 and 1.75 A1

10(b) indication of area being proportional to class frequency 4 M1

3 or 4 correct heights drawn 2.5 4 14 7.5 A2


(allow A1 for two correct)

fully correct histogram A1

10(c) masses of individual turtles unknown oe 1 B1

10(d) evidence of 19 – 20 and 235 – 245 classes being used 3 M1

240/19.5 A1

12 A1

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

11(a) correctly plotted points 2 B2


(allow B1 for 8 or 9 correct)

11(b) strong 2 B1

negative B1

11(c) method for USA 3 M1

plot of (9.6, 13) A1

plot of (4.4, 21) and (7, 17) B1

11(d) straight line through at least two of their plots in (c) 4 B1

correct method for gradient M1

correct method for c M1

m = –1.54 to – 1.53 and c = 27 to 28 inclusive A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 8 of 9


4040/13 Cambridge O Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2018

Partial
Question Answer Marks
Marks

11(e) use x = 5 in their equation or to read from their line 2 M1

20 ft A1

11(f) use their answer from (e) 3 M1


and use 7 and 13 in their equation or to read from their line

(their 20/26) ¯ (17/26) ¯ (their 8/26) M1

0.155 oe A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 9 of 9

You might also like